Exhibit 10.17
Nortel Networks plc LambdaNet Communications Gesellschaft mbH
Frame Contract to Supply DWDM and SDH Equipment
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX 1: PRICE
APPENDIX 2: TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEMS
CHAPTER 1: GUARANTEED ATTRIBUTES
CHAPTER 2: WORKAROUND - AGREEMENTS
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS DWDM SYSTEMS
Optical Line Terminal
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
Optical Line Amplifier
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS SDH SYSTEMS
ADM-64/4 (TN-64X)
ADM-16/1 (TN-16XE / TN-4XE)
DXC-N/1 (TN-16XE / TN-4XE))
TM-N/1 (TN-4XE)
TM-N/1 (TN-1X)
TN-1C
TN-16X
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
Path Management System
Element Management System
APPENDIX 3: SPECIFICATION OF SERVICES
APPENDIX 4: SITE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 5: IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES
Guidelines for the Layout of Signal Distribution Frames
Technical Guidelines on Cable Lengths
APPENDIX 7: DATA PROTECTION AND NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT
APPENDIX 8: LIST OF AFFILIATES ACCORDING TO SECTION 15
FRAMEWORK AGREEMENT*
between
LambdaNet Communications Gesellschaft mbH
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇▇▇-Allee 13
30 177 Hannover
hereinafter referred to as "LambdaNet"
and
Nortel Networks plc
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇.
hereinafter referred to as "Nortel Networks"
concerning the purchase of the transmission systems and associated services
-----------
* Portions of this agreement are confidential and have been omitted and filed
separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to a
request for confidential treatment in accordance with Rule 406 under the
Securities Act of 1933, as amended. Asterisks, for example "*****," have
been inserted to indicate that information has been deleted.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Scope of supply....................................................................3
2 Usufruct...........................................................................4
3 Integration of third party systems.................................................5
4 Liability for the violation of third party rights..................................5
5 Informational obligations of the Contractor........................................6
6 Products of third party producers..................................................7
7 Prices / Terms of payment..........................................................7
8 Ordering...........................................................................8
9 Type acceptance....................................................................9
10 Field acceptance...............................................................10
11 Taking back defective products / parts, complete disposal......................10
12 System documentation...........................................................11
13 Site documentation.............................................................11
14 Investigation and reporting obligation.........................................12
15 Delivery times.................................................................12
16 Development milestones.........................................................12
17 Repair times...................................................................13
18 MTBF- Guarantee................................................................14
19 Warranty.......................................................................14
20 Liability for claims to compensation for damages...............................15
21 Transfer of risk and transfer of ownership.....................................16
22 Permits........................................................................17
23 Availability of spare parts....................................................17
24 Confidentiality and data protection............................................17
25 Training.......................................................................18
26 Term of contract...............................................................18
27 Year 2000 compatibility........................................................18
28 Force majeure..................................................................19
29 Other..........................................................................19
PREAMBLE
LambdaNet (formerly Carriers` Carrier Gesellschaft mbH) and Nortel Dasa Networks
Systems GmbH & Co. KG on February 21, 1999 executed a frame contract regarding
the purchase of transmission systems and services related thereto, which applies
to Germany. LambdaNet now plans to also build and operate transmission lines for
telecommunications services (telecommunications transport networks) in several
countries of Europe. LambdaNet plans to order the transmission systems required
therefor and the services related thereto from Nortel Networks and its
affiliates. This agreement shall be the base for the cooperation of the parties
in Europe except for Germany
On the basis of the aforesaid premises, the parties agree to the following.
1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1.1 This frame contract sets out the terms and conditions according to
which LambdaNet, or its affiliates within the meaning of section 15
ff. AktG, may purchase transmission systems and services related
thereto from Nortel Networks or its affiliates within the meaning of
section 15 ff. AktG. If required LambdaNet or its affiliates shall
place orders for deliveries and services under this frame contract
with Nortel Networks or its affiliates. Contractual relationships
arising from the respective orders shall come into existence between
the company which places the order (,,Purchaser") and the company
which accepts the order (,,Contractor").A list of such Nortel Networks
affiliates which may act as Contractor besides Nortel Networks is
enclosed as Annex 8. Annex 8 also contains a survey of the countries
in which the respective affiliates operate. A list of LambdaNets
affiliates which besides LambdaNet are entitled to place orders under
this frame contract with Nortel Networks or its affiliates is enclosed
as Annex 8.
1.2 The scope of supply to be provided by the Contractor consists of the
delivery, installation and commissioning of the transmission system
described in Appendix 2 (referred to below as "system"). These include
the network elements such as multiplexers and repeaters and the items
needed to control the network elements - management software,
accompanying platforms for computer, operating system and database -
and other hardware and software required to link the network elements
to the management system.
1.3 The Contractor shall also provide the regular and optional services
described in Appendix 4 for all systems supplied within the context of
this contract. Services that differ on a national level will be agreed
upon by LambdaNet and Nortel Networks and included as a national
appendix.
1.4 The functions and services specified in Appendix 2 and Appendix 4
shall be guaranteed by the Contractor. Moreover, the Contractor shall
guarantee the properties listed in Appendix 2, Section 1.
1.5 Components of this contract shall be the text of this contract and the
Appendices attached to this contract:
Appendix 1: Prices
Appendix 2: System Feature Descriptions
Appendix 4: Specifications of Services
Appendix 3: Scope of supply location documentation
Appendix 4: Construction guidelines
Appendix 5: Confidentiality agreement
Appendix 7: Data protection and confidentiality
obligation
Appendix 8: List of Nortel Networks' and Lambdanet's
affiliates, within the meaning of section
15 ff. AktG.
1.6 No claim to the conclusion and performance of individual purchase
contracts shall exist on the basis of this framework contract.
LambdaNet is planning a DWDM backbone network in France and Spain and
will ensure that LambdaNet or one of its affiliates, as described in
Appendix 8, orders its system technology from Nortel Networks.
2 USUFRUCT
2.1 The Contractor shall guarantee to the Purchaser the non-exclusive
right, and unlimited in terms of time, for companies connected with
the Purchaser in accordance with the provisions of Sections 15 ff.
of AktG [Law on Limited Liability Companies], to use the software of
the system with the accompanying documentation or allow third parties
to use it. The Right to use is limited to those countries in which the
System is delivered or from which the network is operated.
2.2 The Purchaser shall not be permitted to modify, disassembly,
decompile, back-translate or in any other way decode the software
supplied by the Contractor. This prohibition shall not apply to the
extent that there is an enforceable provision of law opposed to it.
The Purchaser must obligate its subcontractors to comply with these
license conditions. However, the Contractor shall guarantee to the
Purchaser the right to modify and to translate the system
documentation in accordance with Section 12 and the site documentation
in accordance with Section 13 for the Purchaser's own purposes.
2.3 The Contractor shall guarantee to the Purchaser the right to integrate
the supplied system wholly or in part into the software programs of
third parties. In this respect, the Contractor shall, without
additional compensation, make available for inspection the information
necessary for such integration requested by the Purchaser concerning
the external interfaces to his system. This includes in particular the
following information:
- Description of the communication protocol used on the interface
(description of the protocol for each layer),
- Description of the protocol data units used in the protocol for
each layer,
- Description of the rules applied for the coding of the
information,
- Description of the information model,
- Explicit list of the alarms supplied through the interface.
Furthermore, the Contractor shall prepare information on the databases
of the supplied management system that are needed for the integration.
These include in particular:
- List of the DB table names,
- Description of the DB table fields,
- Description of the coding rules of the DB table entries,
- Description of the DB triggers used,
- Description of the DB functions used,
- Description of the DB procedures used.
The information about the databases shall be submitted to the
Purchaser upon their written request. After submission of the
information, the Contractor shall immediately and comprehensively
instruct the Purchaser concerning planned modifications in the
databases on which the supplied management system is based.
2.4 The Contractor shall also guarantee to the Purchaser the right to have
a third party perform the integration of its systems into the software
programs of third parties, if the Purchaser so chooses. In this
respect, the Purchaser shall have the right to distribute the
information obtained concerning interfaces and databases to third
parties, whereby this information must only be distributed to third
parties within the context of and for the purposes of integrating the
Contractor's system into the software programs of third parties. If
the third party is a company that produces hardware and software of
the same type as the subject matter of the contract, the distribution
of information shall require the prior consent of the Contractor, who
shall refuse such a request only for important reasons. In any event,
before distributing information to a third party, the Purchaser shall
conclude an information protection agreement with such party. The
Contractor shall support the Purchaser in the integration of his
system into the software programs of third parties to an appropriate
extent. The support shall be offered without additional compensation
unless the services he is to provide demonstrably exceed the
information obligation described in 2.3. Services that exceed this
shall be compensated on the basis of the labour cost at the agreed per
diem rates.
3 INTEGRATION OF THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS
The Contractor hereby declares himself ready to integrate systems of
third parties into the management system in accordance with Appendix
2. Upon request by the Purchaser, the Contractor shall present a
quotation for this. The integration shall be done on the basis of the
interfaces available on the systems of third parties. The Purchaser
shall arrange for the third party in question to make available for
inspection the information needed on the interfaces involved. In this
respect, the Contractor, by his signature of the Agreement on Secrecy
vis-a-vis Third Parties, declares his agreement to abide by this
provision.
4 LIABILITY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS
4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible to assure that the subject matter
of the contract is free from third party patent rights that exclude or
limit its use. The Contractor shall assume the sole responsibility,
unlimited by amount, in relation to any party that asserts a claim
that patent rights have been violated and shall release the Purchaser
from all legally enforceable third party claims of this type to the
full extent of such claims, in so far as the Purchaser fulfils its
obligations according to paragraph 4.3.
4.2 If the contractually stipulated use by the Purchaser of the system
supplied by the Contractor or parts thereof is affected or prohibited
by an asserted violation of third party patent rights, the Contractor
shall be authorised and obligated at his own expense to exercise
whichever of the following two options he prefers:
a) to procure for the Purchaser the right to use the system without
limitation and without additional expense for the Purchaser, or
b) to modify or replace the system, or the parts of it in question,
such that it no longer falls under the patent rights of third
parties, yet still corresponds to the contractual specifications.
In addition, the Contractor shall be liable under 20.4 b).
4.3 The Purchaser shall:
a) give notice to the Contractor of any actual or threatened action
or claim forthwith upon becoming aware of the same;
b) give the Contractor the sole conduct of the defence to any actual
or threatened action or claim in respect of an alleged
intellectual property infringement and shall not at any time
admit liability or otherwise attempt to settle or compromise the
said action or claim except upon the express written instructions
of the Contractor;
c) act in accordance with the reasonable instructions of the
Contractor and shall give to the Contractor such assistance as it
shall reasonably require in respect of the conduct of the said
defence including, without prejudice to the generality of the
foregoing, the filing of all pleadings and other court process
and the provision of all relevant documents.
4.4 All claims by the Purchaser based on violation of third party patent
rights shall be asserted with the aforesaid provision.
5 INFORMATIONAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR
5.1 The Contractor shall undertake to instruct the Purchaser immediately
of foreseeable and actual delays in completing the performance of the
contract.
5.2 The Contractor shall undertake to inform the Purchaser concerning
changes of the status of science and technology, particularly with
regard to new products of the Contractor that have become known on the
market, that have possible repercussions on the subject matter of the
contract, and concerning new technical knowledge.
5.3 If the Contractor recognises that he cannot satisfy an agreed
performance requirement according to Appendix 2 or Appendix 4, he must
immediately communicate this to the Purchaser in writing including the
reasons for it and the consequences of it that are recognisable to him
and at the same time make corresponding proposals for modifications,
which, insofar as the Contractor himself is not in the position to
complete the modification proposal himself, must also consist in the
delivery of OEM equipment. The parties shall jointly determine whether
the modification proposal can be accepted by the Purchaser, whereby
the Purchaser shall not be permitted to refuse acceptance of the
modification proposal within reasonable parameters. If the Purchaser
accepts the modification proposal, then the additional expenses that
may result shall not be charged to the Purchaser. If the Purchaser
refuses the modification proposal, then the Purchaser shall be
authorised to request a deduction from the price, or, if the entire
system is affected in more than a minor way by the failure to fulfil
the performance requirement, even at this point in time the Purchaser
shall be entitled to demand withdrawal (cancellation) from the
individual purchase contracts or indemnification for damages because
of non-performance according to reasonable judgement.
6 PRODUCTS OF THIRD PARTY PRODUCERS
If standard application software is a part of the subject matter of
the contract and this standard application software is purchased by
the Purchaser on its own volition, or if the Purchaser purchases
additional hardware, operating system software and other software for
the operation of the subject matter of the contract, the following
shall apply:
The Contractor shall communicate to the Purchaser which standard
application software, hardware, operating system software and other
software is needed for the operation of the subject matter of the
contract. The Contractor shall guarantee that this standard
application software operates fault-free as a part of the subject
matter of the contract and that the hardware, operating system
software and other software operates fault-free together with the
subject matter of the contract, unless a merely insignificant fault is
present. Furthermore, the Contractor shall assure that no additional
hardware, operating system software or other software is necessary for
the operation of the devices described in Appendix 2.
If the Purchaser would like to use different hardware or operating
system software, then the Contractor shall undertake to communicate to
the Purchaser whether this hardware and operating system software is
likewise suited to operate fault-free together with the subject matter
of the contract. If this is the case, the Contractor shall issue an
guarantee of this.
7 PRICES / TERMS OF PAYMENT
7.1 The prices cited in Appendix 1 are fixed prices in DM with the
statutorily mandated locally prevailing value added tax to be added.
They shall apply for all orders according to the provisions of this
framework agreement and are to be understood as f.o.b. to the site of
use (DDP in accordance with ICC-Incoterms 1990), including packing and
disposal of packing materials. For delivery to countries outside of
the EU, the Contractor can invoice the Purchaser for the associated
import duties. In the event that payments have to be made in local
currency according to law, the DM prices shall be converted into Euro
prices at the exchange rate prevailing at the time of presentation of
invoice by the Contractor.
7.2 A partial invoice for 25% of the entire order shall be presented upon
the successful delivery of the ordered goods to their destination. The
invoice for the remaining 75% shall be presented subject to prior
successful field acceptance testing and signature of the corresponding
field acceptance certificate (FAC). With the exception of the
aforementioned partial invoice, there shall be no further partial
invoices unless the field acceptance cannot be performed as a result
of acts or ommissions of the Purchaser. A copy of the corresponding
FAC shall be attached to the invoice. If the Purchaser, neither issues
the FAC and sends it to the Contractor, nor complains about any
defects within 5 business days after completion of the acceptance
test, the acceptance shall be considered declared and the FAC shall be
considered as issued. The Contractor can present quarterly invoices
for existing and ongoing services.
7.3 Each invoice amount shall be payable within 30 days net after the
invoice is received.
7.4 The agreed prices for hardware, software and services are maximum
prices (not to exceed prices) and shall not be exceeded in any add-on
orders. Should price reductions result because of a change in the
overall price structure, they shall be taken into account in any
add-on orders.
7.5 For commercial goods (third party products), the Contractor shall
guarantee that his prices for the Purchaser are calculated on the
basis of his purchase prices plus a maximum ▇▇▇▇-up 20%. If the
Contractor at the point in time of the procurement attains favourable
purchase prices, then he shall pass the attained price advantage on to
the Purchaser.
7.6 Invoices shall be sent to the respective Purchaser.
8 ORDERING
8.1 Depending on its needs, the Purchaser shall call for the Contractor's
supplies and services included in the scope of supply within the
parameters of the particular agreed delivery and performance times
individually or jointly - possibly separated according to location -
in the form of a written order on the respective Contractor.
8.2 Along with the name of the supply or service to be provided, the
orders shall include the place and time the performance is to be
provided, as well as further details where needed.
8.3 Modifications of orders that have already been placed are legally
binding only if they are made in writing by the Purchasing and
Logistics Section of the Purchaser or from a representative expressly
empowered for this.
8.4 If the Contractor, upon receiving an order, determines that he for any
reason cannot complete the required supplies and services within
established deadlines, then he shall immediately make this known to
the Purchaser in writing.
8.5 The Contractor shall assume the risk of accidental destruction of the
system components during storage by the Contractor. This provision
shall not apply if the storage is done by the Purchaser in areas made
available by the Purchaser or its customers.
8.6 The order shall be considered accepted if it conforms with the
provisions of this Frame Agreement and a complaint has not been filed
with the Purchaser within 5 business days of receipt of the order by
the Purchaser. This also applies if the order deviates in only an
insignificant manner from the provisions of this Frame Agreement.
8.7 The Purchaser purchase order number must always be indicated in
correspondence related to the order.
8.8 The positioning of the order shall not be altered in order
confirmations, delivery notes and invoices. Additional items shall
be placed at the end.
8.9 Additional agreements on ordering of supplies and services are
described in Appendix 4, Section "Ordering".
8.10 For administrative convenience, this Frame Agreement will be centrally
administered by Nortel Networks , and the Purchaser shall accordingly
issue all purchase orders and submit to the Contractor with a copy to
Nortel Networks. This lies outside the scope of the agreements of the
individual contracts according to paragraph 1.1 and the production of
contractual fulfillment by the Purchaser and the Contractor.
8.11 All purchase orders will be raised by LambdaNet, either on its own
behalf or in the name of LambdaNet`s affiliate in the country of
deployment, or by the respective affiliate itself, on the Nortel
Networks affiliate in the country in which the System is to be
provided.
All purchase orders are to be sent to the Contractor with a copy to
Nortel Networks at the following address:
NORTEL NETWORKS plc
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇.
FOR THE ATTENTION OF ▇▇. ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇, LAMBDANET ACCOUNT TEAM
The Nortel Networks Contract Administrator will ensure that all
purchase orders are directed to the correct Nortel Networks affiliate.
9 TYPE ACCEPTANCE
9.1 All types of systems and system components shall be subject to a type
acceptance test. The type acceptance test shall be conducted by the
Purchaser according to the procedure/conditions described in Appendix
4, Section "Type Acceptance". The Contractor shall undertake to
support the Purchaser on an uncompensated basis in the type acceptance
testing to the extent defined in Appendix 3. In particular, the
Contractor must provide the equipment adjustment and support services
described in Appendix 4 on an uncompensated basis. The Purchaser shall
confirm the type acceptance to the Contractor with a Type Acceptance
Certificate (TAC).
9.2 In the event of non-acceptance of the type, the term of default of the
Contractor shall be calculated retroactively from the time the "Ready
for Type Acceptance" was communicated, in accordance with the
provisions of Appendix 3, Section 2.1, unless the Purchaser is to
blame for delaying the start and execution of the type acceptance
test. The parties hereby agree that the initiation of the type
acceptance test shall be regarded as timely if it occurs within one
calendar week after the communication of "ready for type acceptance".
The Purchaser shall undertake to commence the testing within this
period. The parties to the contract shall employ qualified personnel
to conduct the test.
9.3 Unless the Purchaser requests otherwise in writing, the Contractor
shall supply to the Purchaser only the hardware and software versions
for which the Purchaser has conducted a successful type acceptance
test. Modifications in the version of hardware and software after the
initial type acceptance of a system or a system component shall
require prior testing and approval by the Purchaser. This shall be
performed according to the procedure described in Appendix 4, Section
"Type Modification".
9.4 The type acceptance shall not release the Contractor from his warranty
obligations.
10 FIELD ACCEPTANCE
10.1 The acceptance of the particular supplies and services shall be
carried out at each place of destination by means of a field
acceptance test conducted by the Purchaser. The Contractor shall
undertake to support the Purchaser in the field acceptance testing on
an uncompensated basis to the extent defined in Appendix 3. The field
acceptance for each individual order shall be completed if all of the
required hardware and software has been completely supplied to the
designated site of use and the order based on the specifications of
the Purchaser is completely installed, cabled, connected to the power
grid and the management system, tested, documented and delivered to
the Purchaser or to a representative expressly empowered for this. The
Purchaser shall confirm the field acceptance to the Contractor by a
Field Acceptance Certificate (FAC). The signing of the field
acceptance certificate shall proceed immediately after the successful
completion of the field acceptance.
10.2 The installation of the system shall be performed according to the
construction guidelines attached as Appendix 4.
10.3 The field acceptance shall be performed according to the procedure and
conditions described in Appendix 3, Section "Field Acceptance".
10.4 The field acceptance shall be considered declared, notwithstanding the
specifications cited in Appendix 3, if the system or parts thereof
have been placed in actual operation. This provision does not apply if
the Contractor is late with his supplies or services and the Purchaser
places the system or parts thereof in actual operation in order to
satisfy demonstrable existing obligations to the customers of the
Purchaser (so-called "provisional actual operation"). In this case,
the Contractor shall obtain a part of the compensation agreed for the
system or parts thereof as a monthly use compensation even before the
field acceptance test. The amount of the use compensation shall be
calculated according to the sum of the agreed prices for the hard and
software supplied up until the provisional operational commissioning
in consideration of a depreciation time of years (calculation example:
sum of the prices for supplied hard and software: 5 (years) : 12
(months) = monthly use compensation). The use compensation shall be
due at the beginning of each month for the preceding month. It is to
be credited against the compensation to be paid by the Purchaser for
the system or parts thereof after the field acceptance. The payment of
the use compensation shall not represent a waiver by the Purchaser of
possible claims for default or of payment of a contract penalty;
Section 341 BGB [German Civil Code] shall not apply. If the
provisional actual operation lasts longer than 2 months, then the
system or parts thereof that were commissioned shall be considered as
accepted.
10.5 In the event the acceptance is denied, the term of default of the
Contractor shall be counted retroactively from the time "Site Ready
for Acceptance" was communicated in accordance with the provisions of
Appendix 3, Section 2.1 " (RfA), unless the Purchaser is to blame for
delays in the commencement and execution of the acceptance test. The
parties hereby agree that commencement of the acceptance test within
one calendar week of the communication "Ready for Field Acceptance"
shall be regarded as timely. The Purchaser shall undertake to commence
the test within this time period. The parties shall employ qualified
personnel for the execution of the tests.
11 TAKING BACK DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS / PARTS, COMPLETE DISPOSAL
11.1 The Contractor shall take back transport packing without compensation
and bear the costs for disposal.
11.2 The Contractor shall be obligated to take back system components that
are defective or no longer needed and dispose of them in a proper
manner without compensation. The sender shall bear the delivery costs.
If the statutory situation changes during the term of the contract,
both parties shall jointly come to agreement on the resulting
additional costs of the disposal.
11.3 Upon request of the Purchaser, the Contractor shall present proof of
the properly conducted disposal.
12 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
12.1 The Contractor shall make available to the Purchaser one complete set
of paper form system documentation in triplicate copy for each unit
supplied. If the Purchaser so desires, the system documentation or
parts thereof can also be supplied in software form (e.g. CD-ROM). The
Purchaser shall be authorised to copy it to use for the production of
its own manuals and specifications. The copyrights to the system
documentation shall in any case remain with the Contractor.
12.2 The system documentation shall describe in a comprehensive and
comprehensible way the operation, the mode of functioning, the
characteristics and the technical structure of the system components.
It shall include, among other things, installation instructions,
repair instructions, operating instructions and technical
specifications.
12.3 Installation instructions and operating instructions shall be composed
in the respectively agreed language. The technical specification can
be composed in the English language.
12.4 The review of the system documentation is an item subject to type
acceptance testing.
12.5 The Contractor shall immediately instruct the Purchaser concerning
faults and defects in the system documentation subsequently recognised
and correct the system documentation accordingly. In particular, the
Contractor shall adapt the system documentation to modifications of
the hardware and software versions. Individual changes can be made
with adequately referenced modification pages. With multiple or
extensive modifications, the Contractor shall supply a reworked
version of the system documentation. The services performed to make
the corrections shall in any case be on an uncompensated basis.
13 SITE DOCUMENTATION
13.1 The Contractor shall compile a complete set of site documentation and
shall deliver it to the Purchaser at the time of the field acceptance.
Structure and contents of the site documentation are described in
Appendix 4. The composition and supply of the site documentation shall
in any case be made on an uncompensated basis.
13.2 The review of the site documentation is an item subject to field
acceptance testing.
13.3 The Contractor shall instruct the Purchaser immediately concerning
faults and defects in the site documentation subsequently discovered
and shall correct the site documentation accordingly. Subsequent
installations at a site shall be recorded in the site documentation
that has already been composed. The Contractor in these cases shall
modify or supplement the existing site documentation to the extent
required. Individual modifications or supplements can be made with
adequately referenced modification pages. With multiple or extensive
modifications, the Contractor shall supply a reworked version of the
site documentation. The documentation services of the Contractor shall
be provided in any case on an uncompensated basis.
14 INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING OBLIGATION
14.1 Apart from an extensive review, the Purchaser can satisfy itself of
the suitability of the supply by a random sampling review.
14.2 The Contractor shall waive any additional right to file a claim of
violation of the obligation to conduct immediate review and reporting
in accordance with Section 377, 378 HGB.
15 DELIVERY TIMES
15.1 The delivery times are established in Appendix 4, Section "Delivery
Times" and shall be indicated with the corresponding orders.
15.2 If the Contractor is late in the delivery of the system ready for
acceptance or parts thereof, then the Contractor shall be obligated to
pay a contract penalty in the amount of 0.25% per calendar day of the
price of the network elements delivered late, plus the price of any
network elements that cannot be used commercially because of the late
delivery, up to a maximum amount of 15% of this reference amount.
According to the provisions of this Item 15.2, commercially usefulness
shall mean that the usefulness of the network elements must neither be
completely disabled nor substantially limited in terms of the
telecommunications services or the administration of them (network
management) - whereby a substantial limitation of the administration
is present even if the Purchaser has an increased operational expense.
In addition, the Contractor shall be liable under 20.4 b) in the event
that the Purchaser is prevented, as a direct result of the delay, from
providing contracted services to its customers The Contractor can
avoid the payment of the contract penalty and liability under clause
20.4 b), if he completes the overdue delivery within a grace period of
two weeks of notification of default. All claims of the Purchaser
because of default in the delivery of the system or parts thereof
shall be compensated according to this provision. The right of the
Purchaser to withdraw from the purchase order according to item 26.2
in the event the above 15% maximum penalty is reached shall remain
unaffected by this provision.
15.3 No proviso according to Section 341 Par. 3 BGB shall needed to assert
a claim for the contract penalty; this can be asserted up to six (6)
months after receipt of the final invoice.
16 DEVELOPMENT MILESTONES
16.1 Nortel Networks shall undertake to develop the system components
further in relation to the characteristics and functions specified in
Appendix 2 and to make them available to LambdaNet for the type
acceptance test on the dates listed below, unless LambdaNet determines
a later date for the acceptance test:
T2: **
T3: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
*: **
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
*: **
16.2 If Nortel Networks is late in readying the system and characteristics
cited in Appendix 2, Section 1, or parts of said system, for the type
acceptance test, then Nortel Networks shall be obligated to pay a
contract penalty in the weekly amount of 2 % of the penalty amount
cited in Appendix 2, Chapter 1, up to the entire penalty amount,
unless LambdaNet has accepted a modification proposal according to the
terms of the provisions under item 5.3. The contract penalty will be
calculated from the respective milestone date, in any case no earlier
than the date of signature of the Frame Agreement. Nortel Networks can
avoid the payment of the contract penalty if he makes the system and
characteristics cited in Appendix 2, Section 1 available for type
acceptance testing within a grace period of two weeks after
notification of default. Nortel Networks shall also not be obligated
to pay the contract penalty, if LambdaNet, in spite of the delay, can
completely fulfil its obligations to its customers to provide
telecommunications services. The preceding sentence shall apply
accordingly, if, in spite of the systems or characteristics that turn
out to be late, no significant effects result for the conduct of
operations. The payment of this contract penalty can be claimed by
LambdaNet in addition to the contract penalty according to Item 15.2
of this contract. In this case, the contract penalty according to Item
15.2 shall be credited against the contract penalty according to this
paragraph. If LambdaNet asserts the existing claim for payment of the
contract penalty according to Item 16.2, a deduction shall be made
against the purchase price. The contract penalty to be paid by Nortel
Networks according to this Item 16.2 shall be limited to an overall
total amount of ********. All claims by LambdaNet based on
default in making the systems and characteristics cited in Appendix 2,
Section 1 available for type acceptance testing shall be asserted with
the aforesaid provision.
16.3 No proviso in accordance with Section 341 Par. 3 BGB shall be required
in asserting a claim for the contract penalty; on the contrary, it can
be asserted up to 6 months after receipt of the final invoice.
17 REPAIR TIMES
17.1 If the Purchaser requires the repair and maintenance services
according to Appendix 4, Section "Maintenance Services", the
Contractor shall undertake to adhere to the repair times (Time to
Repair, TTR) according to Appendix 4, Chapter "Corrective Maintenance
Service".
17.2 If the Contractor is late in completing a repair order or parts
thereof, then the Contractor shall be obligated to pay the following
contract penalties:
*** ** if up to 6 h late
*** ** if from 6 h to 12 h late
*** ** if from 12 h to 18 h late
*** ** if from 18 h to 36 h late
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
For each additional 24 hour period that the Contractor's default
continues, the Contractor shall be obligated to pay an additional
contract penalty of ****** up to an additional total amount of
****** per repair. Further claims for compensation of damages in
the event that the Contractor is late in completing a repair order or
parts thereof shall not apply. The Purchaser's right to fulfilment of
performances shall remain unaffected by the aforesaid provision. In
the event that the above maximum penalty is reached, the Purchaser may
perform itself or have a third party perform the repair order or part
thereof, and claim the costs incurred. No proviso in accordance with
Section 341 Par. 3 BGB shall be required in asserting a claim for the
contract penalty; on the contrary, it can be asserted up to 6 months
after receipt of the final invoice.
18 MTBF- GUARANTEE
18.1 Notwithstanding his other warranty obligations the Contractor shall be
responsible to guarantee in particular the MTBF (Mean Time Between
Failures) values listed in Appendix 2 for the system components. The
Contractor shall immediately conduct a technically documented and
comprehensive review of any atypically frequent occurrences of system
failures observed by the Purchaser and instruct the Purchaser in
detail on the results of the review. Any design, production or
material faults coming to light shall be reported immediately to the
Purchaser. The repair of the defect on the installed systems shall be
carried out immediately by the Contractor in co-ordination with the
Purchaser on an uncompensated basis within the warranty period.
18.2 Independent of 18.1 the Contractor shall be responsible to inform the
Purchaser immediately if risks become known to him which could
endanger adherence to the agreed MTBF values.
19 WARRANTY
19.1 The contract shall guarantee that the system according to Appendix 2
corresponds to the contractual requirements, in particular that it has
the guaranteed characteristics and is not encumbered with defects that
negate or reduce the value or fitness for the standard or
contractually stipulated use.
19.2 The Contractor shall guarantee that the system components he is to
supply correspond to the currently valid and applicable safety
standards, the manadatory provisions of the applicable regulatory
authorities and the currently valid and applicable standards regarding
EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility). The Contractor shall further
guarantee compliance with all trade association health and safety
requirements and all other standards for telecommunications equipment.
19.3 The warranty period for functional utility and freedom of the system
components and the system from faults shall amount to a total of 24
months from the issuance of the corresponding Field Acceptance
Certificate. Refer to the provision under item 7.2, second paragraph
regarding the issuance of the FAC.
19.4 For all components of the system that, because of the interruption in
operation that becomes necessary for improvement repairs or deliveries
of spare parts, cannot be used as stipulated by contract, the warranty
period shall be extended by the duration of the interruption.
19.5 The Contractor must repair defects in the supplies and services
discovered during the warranty period immediately upon demand within 5
calendar days on an uncompensated basis, including incidental costs..
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
If a repair is not possible or if the acceptance of repaired parts is
not appropriate for the Purchaser, then the Contractor must replace
the defective parts with new ones. If the fault is not repaired in
spite of three deliveries of spare parts, the Purchaser can return the
entire system and demand a refund of the purchase price, provided that
the fault is of Class A according to Appendix 3. The Contractor shall
guarantee a repair or spare parts just as he does for the original
delivery, and specifically either until expiration of the warranty for
the originally supplied part or after 6 (six) months have passed,
whichever is later.
19.6 If this involves not just defects in individual devices, but more
serious systemic faults or a series of serious faults, the Purchaser
can set an appropriate deadline period for the repair of these
defects. If this period expires before the defect is repaired, the
Purchaser can, at its own discretion, withdraw wholly or in part from
the individual purchase contracts, return the devices that have
already been delivered and demand a refund for the part of the
purchase price that has already been remitted and demand compensation
for damages.
The costs (shipping, labour, and material costs) for any recall
measures arranged by the Contractor that may become necessary shall be
borne by the Contractor.
19.7 The failure to fulfil the technical specifications according to
Appendix 2, the lack of required permits and the deviation from
specifications according to 19.2 shall be considered defects, unless
specific specifications according to this contract are expressly
declared non-essential according to this contract.
19.8 In the event of software defects, the Contractor must remedy the
faults as rapidly as possible. Recourse to a provisional solution that
is reasonable for the Purchaser can be made in this situation to avoid
down times in the interim. If the defect cannot be remedied within an
appropriate time, the Contractor must install a completely new version
of the affected software. If this does not remedy the defect
completely, the Purchaser shall have the right to refuse the entire
system and withdraw entirely from the contract.
19.9 If the Contractor ends up being late in fulfilling his obligation to
remedy the defect, the Purchaser can itself take the required
measures, notwithstanding the warranty obligation of the Contractor,
provided that this measure is harmony with the repair instructions of
the Contractor submitted to the Purchaser. The Purchaser can ▇▇▇▇ the
Contractor for the resulting costs. Except in urgent cases, the
Contractor shall be informed before execution of such measures; after
the execution of the repair work, the Contractor shall receive a
report on the type and scope of the defects and the work performed.
19.10 The right to withdrawal or price deduction shall remain unaffected by
the aforesaid provision. Further claims for damages are excluded.
20 LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS TO COMPENSATION FOR DAMAGES
20.1 For claims by the Purchaser to compensation for damages, no matter
what type and no matter on which legal grounds, the Contractor, his
employees and his resource personnel in the performance of the
contract shall be liable according to mandatory statutory regulations,
unless a specific provision of this contract stipulates otherwise.
20.2 The Contractor shall be completely liable within the context of and
according to the regulations of the Product Liability Law.
20.3 Subject to clause 20.4, neither party shall be liable to the other for
indirect or consequential damages or lost profits, save in the case of
premeditated behaviour.
20.4 If parties contracting with the Purchaser assert claims for
compensation of damages against the Purchaser that are related to the
fact that said parties are required by their end customers to provide
compensation for material damages within the limits of the TKV, or the
limits of the respective applicable regulation:
a) the Contractor shall be liable without limit for the compensation
of these damages to the extent that they are attributable to
premeditated behaviour of the Contractor in relation to the
Purchaser;
b) the Contractor will reimburse the Purchaser
1.) 50% of the damages, insofar as these are the result of a delivery
delay according to paragraph 15.2, and
2.) 99% of the damages, insofar as these lead back to a breach of the
rights of a third party according to paragraph 4.
The liability for the damages according to paragraph 20.4b) is subject to
limits per event of ***** and in aggregate of *****.
20.5 For negligence, the Contractor's liability, on whatever legal grounds,
shall be limited to direct damages typical for contracts, excluding
liability for indirect or consequent damages, such as lost profit or
operational failure. Moreover, this liability shall be limited to 4
million DM per instance and overall to 15 million DM. Any contract
penalties paid by the Contractor as well as the liability according to
Item 20.4 shall be taken into account with the aforesaid liability
limit.
21 TRANSFER OF RISK AND TRANSFER OF OWNERSHIP
21.1 The transfer of risk shall be completed upon delivery of the
individual system components in accordance with ICC INCOTERM (1990)
DDP.
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
21.2 The Contractor shall retain ownership of the delivered system
components until the purchase price is completely paid off.
Until the purchase price is completely paid off, the Purchaser shall
not acquire ownership of the delivered system components by virtue of
their installation in other devices. The Contractor shall perform any
servicing of the system components he has supplied. In the event of
installation in outside products by the Purchaser, the Contractor
shall become a co-owner of the resulting product in the same
proportion as the ratio of the value of his system components to the
value of the outside products used with it. The resulting products
shall be regarded as reserved property of the Contractor.
Until cancellation of the reservation of title, the Purchaser,
provided that it meets its payment obligations toward the Contractor,
shall be entitled to resell the supplied system components or the
products resulting by connection in the manner referred above in the
normal course of business operations only under reservation of title.
If third parties tamper with the reserved property, the Purchaser
shall advise them of the Contractor's ownership of it and shall notify
the Contractor immediately. The Purchaser shall assign to the
Contractor even at this point for safety sake all claims accruing to
him from a resale or leasing with additional rights in the amount of
the value of the supplied system components. The Purchaser shall
provisionally be entitled and obligated to collect on the assigned
claims in its own name. The Contractor shall not notify the parties
contracting with the Purchaser of the assignment as long as the
Purchaser satisfies its payment obligations toward the Contractor, is
not in arrears with payment and especially if there has been no filing
for bankruptcy and no suspension of payments.
If the Purchaser does not satisfy its payment obligations to the
Contractor in accordance with the contract, the Contractor shall be
entitled at any time to take back the reserved property; this does not
constitute a withdrawal from the contract. The Contractor shall
release the the Purchaser guarantee amounts to the extent that their
value exceeds all claims to be secured by more than 20 %.
22 PERMITS
The Contractor shall undertake to obtain in a timely manner the
permits necessary for the delivery of the subject matter of the
contract. The lack of necessary permits as such does not constitute a
case of force majeure.
23 AVAILABILITY OF SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of spare parts or
compatible parts, as well as service support, for a time period of 10
years, calculated from the time of the field acceptance of the
particular system component.
24 CONFIDENTIALITY AND DATA PROTECTION
Both parties to the contract shall undertake to comply with the
confidentiality agreement attached as Appendix 6 and the data
protection and confidentiality obligation attached.
25 TRAINING
The Contractor shall undertake to conduct training sessions in
accordance with Appendix , Section "Training" if the Purchaser so
requires. The training sessions shall be conducted in the German
language to the extent possible. If the training sessions are held in
English, the Contractor shall provide an interpreter.
26 TERM OF CONTRACT
26.1 This framework agreement shall have a term of 24 months commencing
with the signature of the contract. The term of the contract can be
extended on the part of the Purchaser with a notification period of 2
months before expiration of the contract period in effect and be
extended each time by one year. The Contractor shall be authorised to
cancel this framework agreement after the expiration of 5 years with a
notification period of 6 months. For the optional repair and
maintenance services according to Appendix , Section "Maintenance
Services" the term shall amount to 6 months. It can be extended on the
part of the Purchaser by an additional 6 months each time with a
notification period of 2 months before expiration of the service
contract period in effect.
26.2 Cancellation for important reasons shall remain unaffected by this
provision. An important reason for the cancellation shall exist if one
of the parties violates essential obligations of this contract and
does not provide a remedy within an appropriate period even after a
written request of the other party. An important reason for both
parties shall exist, for example, in the event of application for or
commencement of a bankruptcy proceeding involving the assets of the
other party or in the event of a denial of such a proceeding for lack
of assets. In the event of a cancellation for important reasons, the
Contractor's services provided up until the cancellation becomes
effective shall be compensated to the extent that they can be used by
the Purchaser for the overall system.
27 YEAR 2000 COMPATIBILITY
27.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the year-2000 compatibility of the
contractual performances.
Year-2000 compatibility shall be understood as performance such that
neither performance nor functionality of a system shall be influenced
by the year numbering before, during and after the year 2000
(definition of the British Standards Institution), unless the
performance or functionality is influenced in a merely insignificant
way.
In particular this means:
- No current date value shall create a system interruption.
- Functions based on dates must perform consistently for a date
before during and after the year 2000.
- In all interfaces and data memories, the date indication must be
specified in all date fields either explicitly or by unambiguous
algorithms.
- The year 2000 must be recognised by the system as a leap year.
27.2 Any claims of the Purchaser in connection with this guarantee must not
expire before 3/31/2001.
28 FORCE MAJEURE
Cases of force majeure that hinder the parties wholly or in part from
fulfilling their obligations release both parties from the fulfilment
of the contract to the extent the performance is hindered until the
force majeure is no longer present. The party for which the force
majeure has occurred must instruct the other party immediately when
this occurs and later when it ends. If, because of a force majeure, a
delay in the performance of more than 30 calendar days occurs, then the
party other than the one effected can cancel the contract without
benefit of a notification period by written communication to the other
party. The performances completed up to this point in time shall be
compensated to the extent that they are economically useful to the
Purchaser and actually used by the Purchaser.
29 OTHER
29.1 General terms and conditions of the parties shall not be applicable.
Collateral agreements shall not be made. Revisions and addenda must be
in written form in order to be valid. This shall also apply for
agreements through which the requirement for written form is supposed
to be limited or nullified.
29.2 The place of performance for supplies and services is the site of use
for each particular supply and service.
29.3 This contract is subject to German law with the exception of the rules
of international civil law. The UN Convention on the International Sale
of Goods shall not apply. The place of jurisdiction for disputes
arising from this contract shall be Hannover.
29.4 Should individual parts of this contract be or become invalid, the
validity of the remaining contractual provisions shall remain
unaffected thereby. In such a case, invalid provisions shall be
replaced by provisions that come as close as possible to the invalid
provisions in terms of their economic purpose. The same shall be true
in the case of an omission.
29.5 Claims of one party arising from this contract can only be assigned
with the written consent of the other. Such an assignment shall not be
denied by the other party except for good reason.
Hannover, date 10-04-00 , date 12-04-00
-------------- ------------ ----------
---------------------------- -----------------------------
/s/
---------------------------- -----------------------------
LambdaNet Nortel Networks
PRODUCT PRICING FOR LAMBDANET PAN-EUROPE NETWORK BUILD
For the European Frame Agreement, the following prices apply on top of the
prices and commercial arrangements as has been defined for the Pan-German
Network build. These prices are applicable for all new orders for equipment not
yet delivered to site.
1. REVISED PRICES ON UNIT LEVEL
1.1 EQUIPMENT PRICES
- 2.5GBit/s transponder ***
- 10GBit/s transponder ***
- 10GBit regen: Until a 2 card version of the STM-64 4 fibre regeneraor
function is ready for deployment, Nortel Network will deliver a 4 card
version. Nortel Network will charge *** for this 4 card regenerator
solution. As soon as the 2 card based regenerator functions is available
for bulk deployment, Nortel Networks will charge *** for this
function.
- TX-16 prices have not been included into the pan-German Contract. The
corresponding TN-16 price list is attached.
- For non (a) OEM hardware and software unit prices as listed in the attached
pan-German pricing, (b) for TN-16X pricing as attached and (c) for unit
prices as listed above, a discount of 10% is to be applied. This discount
does not apply to non per network element priced centralised management
rights to use.
- OPTera Unit Prices are subject to further agreement based on dark fibre vs.
Leased lambda cost trade off calculations.
- All of the price agreements will be incorporated into the pan-German frame
contract by formal amendment.
- These prices are applicable for all new orders.
2. PRICES FOR SERVICES
Prices for Services as defined in the attached price list from pan-German
Network Build are reflecting the German cost level. Prices for Services will be
agreed on a National basis taking into account the National cost level in the
corresponding country.
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
ITEM ORDER CODE ▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇
TN-64X
CORE AND TRANSPORT SHELF
BREAKER MODULE NTCA40AA ***
SC060 SHELF CONTROLLER NTCA41BA ***
32M SHELF CONTROLLER NTCA41CA ***
MESSAGE TRANSFER CARD NTCA48AA ***
PARALELL TELEMETRY CARD NTCA45AA ***
MAINTENANCE INTERFACE CARD NTCA42AA ***
MAINTENANCE INTERFACE CARD (120 MBYTES) S0000300S0000581 ***
MAINTENANCE INTERFACE CARD (120 MBYTES) S0000300S0000545 ***
EUROPEAN 2 MHZ EXTERNAL SYNCHRONIZATION INTERFACE NTCE44BA ***
TRANSPORT SHELF FILLER CARD NTCA49AA ***
TRANSPORT SHELF SWITCH FILLER CARD NTCA49AB ***
COMMON EQUIPMENT FILLER CARD (1 IN.) NTCA59AA ***
OC192/STM64 4FR SWITCH ASSY NTCA24AA ***
OC192/STM64 DEMULTIPLIER (TMUX) NTCA05BA ***
ADM AGGREGATES
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1533.47NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01FK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1528.77NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01MK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1535.04NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01GK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1530.33NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01EK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1539.77NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01RK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1538.19NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01QK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1536.61NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01PK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1531.90NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01NK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1555.75NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01XK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1550.92NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01VK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1557.36NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01LK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1552.52NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01KK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1547.72NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01UK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1558.98NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01YK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1549.32NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01JK ***
OC-192/STM64 ADM 1554.13NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA01WK ***
REGENERATOR AGGREGATES
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1533.47NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03FK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1528.77NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03MK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1535.04NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03GK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1530.33NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03EK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1539.77NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03RK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1538.19NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03QK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1536.61NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03PK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1531.90NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03NK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1555.75NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03XK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1550.92NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03VK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1557.36NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03LK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1552.52NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03KK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1547.72NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03UK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1558.98NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03YK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1549.32NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03JK ***
OC-192/STM64 REGEN 1554.13NM +/- CHIRP ADAPTERLESS NTCA03WK ***
20 September 1999
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
RECEIVERS
OC-192/STM64 SHORT REACH RECEIVER ADAPTERLESS BULK NTCA02BK ***
▇▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ ▇/▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
LICENSES AND SOFTWARE
▇▇-▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ - ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
FEC Licence NTQJ93TF ***
TN-64X APPLICATION - REGENERATOR / MOR NTQJ93TD ***
TN-64X INM RTU
INM Core Management RTU NTNM23BAAG ***
INM Performance Management RTU NTNM23BCAG ***
INM Inventory Management RTU NTNM31BDAG ***
INM Trail Management RTU NTNM12BAAG ***
INM Trail Advisor RTU NTNM12BBAG ***
INM Trail Scheduler NTNM12BCAG ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Inst. STM-4 quad (4*port) card on TN-64X ***
Inst. TN-64X Core system with aggregates ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
TN-64X FLM and TAS See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
OPTera LH
MOR PLUS (BLUE PRE/RED POST) WITH OSC NTCA11NK ***
MOR PLUS (RED PRE/BLUE POST) WITH OSC NTCA11PK ***
1625NM OPTICAL SERVICE CHANNEL (SC) NTCA11CC ***
C/L Band Splitter with 1625nm for ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
100GHZ 8+2W MB/DR, VOA, SC NTCA10CC ***
▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇/▇▇, ▇▇▇, ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
100GHZ 16W UPGRADE MB/DR, VOA, SC NTCA10EC ***
100GHZ 16W UPGRADE MR/DB, VOA, SC NTCA10FC ***
SC-SC ADAPTER KIT NTCC99AC ***
DWDM SHELF ASSY - 4 POS (STD ETSI) NTFW88DA ***
DWDM ADM 33/55,SC NTCA13MC ***
DWDM ADM 35/57,SC NTCA13NC ***
LICENSES AND SOFTWARE
MOR RTU NTCA62DA ***
TN-64X APPLICATION - REGENERATOR / MOR NTQJ93TD ***
MOR+ INM RTU
INM Core Management RTU - MOR NTNM23BAAN ***
INM Inventory Management RTU - MOR NTNM31BDAN ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Install MOR/DWDM Plus ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
MOR+ FLM and TAS See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
DWDM FLM and TAS per site See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
TN-16XE
CORE
SATURN MULTIPLEXER ASSEMBLY NTEU70AA ***
20 September 1999
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
INSTALLATION KIT (ETSI) NTEU57AA ***
SATURN 1" FILLER CARD ASSEMBLY NTEU30AA ***
AGGREGATES
STM-16o AGG 1310 (FC/PC) NTEU25AA ***
TRIBUTARIES
SATURN STM10 DUAL PORT TRIB ASSEMBLY NTEU10AA ***
STM1E/140MBIT TRIB NTEU13AA ***
STM-4O ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
CABLE ASSY (RACK ALARM-SATURN) NTEU4520 ***
TN-16XE INM RTU
INM Core Management RTU NTNM23BAAM ***
INM Performance Management RTU NTNM23BCAM ***
INM Inventory Management RTU - TN-16XE NTNM31BDAM ***
INM TRAIL MANAGER NTNM12BAAM ***
INM TRAIL ADVISOR RTU NTNM12BBAM ***
INM TRAIL SCHEDULER RTU NTNM12BCAM ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Inst. TN-16XE core system with aggregates ***
Inst. STM-1e single port trib card on TN-16XE ***
Inst. STM-1o dual port (2*) trib card on TN-16XE ***
INST. STM-4O TRIB CARD ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
TN-16XE FLM and TAS See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
TN-4XE
CORE
SATURN MULTIPLEXER ASSEMBLY NTEU70AA ***
INSTALLATION KIT (ETSI) NTEU57AA ***
SATURN 1" FILLER CARD ASSEMBLY NTEU30AA ***
SATURN 3" FILLER CARD ASSEMBLY NTEU30AB ***
AGGREGATES
SATURN STM140 AGGREGATE ASSEMBLY NTEU20AA ***
TRIBUTARIES
SATURN STM10 DUAL PORT TRIB ASSEMBLY NTEU10AA ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
Cable assy (Rack Alarm - Saturn) NTEU4520 ***
TN-4XE INM RTU
INM Core Management RTU NTNM23BAAD ***
INM Performance Management RTU NTNM23BCAD ***
INM ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
INM TRAIL MANAGER NTNM12BAAD ***
INM TRAIL ADVISOR RTU NTNM12BBAD ***
INM TRAIL SCHEDULER RTU NTNM12BCAD ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Inst 4XE with aggs ***
Inst. STM-1o dual port (2*) trib card on TN-4XE ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
TN-4XE FLM and TAS See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
TN-1X
CORE
TN-1X Synchronous Access Multiplexer Subrack 25GMU00750GWV ***
Shelf Kit 25SKM00750HFN ***
20 September 1999
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
TN-1X Installation Kit 25SKM00807ABL ***
Local Craft Access Panel Type 1 25UEP00750GXB ***
Service Interface Module Type 10 (Misc) 25UJJ00750GXC ***
Service Interface Module Type ▇▇ (▇▇▇▇) ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
Subrack Cover Kit 25SKM00750HFL ***
Kit -Installation 25SKM00750KAD ***
Dummy Front Panel 1" 25RBN00021AAB ***
Dummy Front Panel 1.6" 25RBN00021AAC ***
Dummy Front Panel 1.8" 25RBN00021AAD ***
Dummy SIA Panel 1" 25RBN00021AAA ***
Power Supply Unit 25UPW00750HAY ***
Subrack Control Unit 25UMN00750GXD ***
Payload Manager (mixed payloads) NTKD10AA ***
AGGREGATES
STM-1 Optical Aggregate CR NTKD20AA ***
TRIBUTARIES
16 x 2 Mbit/s G.703 Tributary Card 120 Ohm 25UJU00750HVQ ***
Traffic Interface Module (▇▇▇) Type 22 25UJJ00750HLV ***
TN-1X INM RTU
INM Core Management RTU NTNM23BAAC ***
INM Performance Management RTU NTNM23BCAC ***
INM Inventory Management RTU NTNM31BDAC ***
INM TRAIL MANAGER NTNM12BAAC ***
INM TRAIL ADVISOR RTU NTNM12BBAC ***
INM TRAIL SCHEDULER RTU NTNM12BCAD ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Inst 1X with aggs ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
TN-1X FLM and TAS See commercial agreement
for Yr. 2000
TN-1C
CORE
TN-1C 8x2/16x2 turbo ADM NTFT52BD ***
TN-1C INSTALLATION KIT (RACK) NTFT06AA ***
TN-1C INM RTU
INM Core Management RTU NTNM23BAAB ***
INM Performance Management RTU NTNM23BCAB ***
INM Inventory Management RTU NTNM31BDAB ***
INM TRAIL MANAGER NTNM12BAAB ***
INM TRAIL ADVISOR RTU NTNM12BBAB ***
INM TRAIL SCHEDULER RTU NTNM12BCAB ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Inst 1C with aggs ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
TN-1C FLM and TAS See commercial agreement
for Yr. 2000
EQUIPMENT PRACTICE
TN-64X
MECH BAY ASSY ETSI TRIB SH (2.0 MHZ SATT) NTCE89BB ***
Mech bay Assy ETSI NTCE89GB ***
MECH BAY ASSY, ETSI 2.0MHZ (W/LINE EXTENSION SH) NTCE89BD ***
ETSI EQUIPMENT PRACTICE
2.2M ETSI RACK, STEEL UPRIGHTS, NO SIDE PANELS NTKD70AB ***
NT ETSI Rack Standard Inst.Kit 25SKM00807ABE ***
20 September 1999
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
ETSI Rack 48V DC Distrib Panel with Rack Alarm Unit 25SKM00807AAN ***
Fan Installation kit (ETSI 3 shelf) NTEU59AA ***
Lower Vent Cover (75mm) P0890340 ***
INTEGRATED NETWORK MANAGEMENT
EC-1 HARDWARE
HP B180 ***
TN-1X Release 8.2 software download (from EC) NTQJ31HE ***
HP-UX 10.20 Y2K Patches, 8 May 98 NTQJ30MC ***
EC-1 RELEASE 13.1 SERVICE PACK 2 NTQJ30MH ***
HP-UX 10.20 Y2K Patches, 8 May 98 NTQJ01EC ***
CORBA INTERFACE RTU
Trail Management feature ***
Inventory Management feature ***
Performance Management feature ***
Fault Management feature ***
Consultancy for above (per day) ***
POPC HARDWARE
PARTITIONED OPC CONTROLLER NTCA50AA ***
PARTITIONED OPC STORAGE MODULE NTCA51AA ***
PARTITIONED OPC IO MODULE NTCA52AA ***
PARTITIONED OPC STORAGE MODULE (for TN-64X) S0000600S0000514 ***
PARTITIONED OPC STORAGE MODULE (for OPTera LH) S0000600S0000583 ***
OPC Flash Cartridge (122M) for OPTera LH S0000700S0000580 ***
OPC Flash Cartridge (122M) for TN-64X S0000700S0000515 ***
SOFTWARE CERTIFICATE NTNM51AD ***
INM APPLICATION ▇▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
INM Resilient platform RTU
(per resilient platform) NTNM51AB ***
INM External Alarm Interface RTU NTNM23AG ***
Netscape for Unix (Fastrack Server and Navigator) NTQJ81AA ***
INM HARDWARE
HP C3000 workstation No longer required ***
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Inst.l hardware for INM (HP) ***
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
INM FLM and TAS See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
INTEGRATION
Site survey per site ***
Integration of Network into the INM See commercial
agreement for Yr. 2000
Integration of Racks (per Rack) ***
DCM
DCM-60 module assy NTCC14CC ***
20 September 1999
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
DCM-80 module assy NTCC14DC ***
DCM-100 module assy NTCC14EC ***
DCM-100N module assy NTCC14HC ***
DCM-300N module assy NTCC14JC ***
FIXED ATTENUATOR, IN-LINE, SC, 5 DB +/- 0.5 DB, 15 ▇▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇-▇-▇ ***
▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
ROUTER 2514 0SI, Interfaces: 2 serial & 2 LAN, Protocols: IP & OSI, NTJM01KA ***
Power 110-220 VAC, 50-60Hz, IOS Enterprise Software
BAYSTACK 106 10 BASE ▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇-▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
10Base-T Hub with 12 ports, RJ45 Connectors, -48VDC Power ***
DCN Router Configuration NTJM99xx ***
CAB-X21MT/CAB-X21FC NTJM02DA ***
HS MODEM ▇▇-▇-▇▇,▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
SHELF CANTELEVER 19IN MOUNTING P0878672 ***
TRANSCEIVER ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
Cable assy (OC192 Ethernet to terminal) NTCC90CA ***
Cable Assy LAN RJ45 - RJ45 h/e 32YCN00727AFA ***
CABLE ASSY (OC192 ETHERNET TO LAN 20M) NTCC90BA ***
MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY, RACK, 37U A0726261 ***
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK FUSED -48VDC A0729324 ***
GPS
TimeSource 3100 10 E1 ▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇▇-▇▇ ***
RG59 (200 foot) 60 meter cable 060-72010-20 ***
TRAINING
Per student per day ***
COMMERCIAL ARRANGEMENTS;
Prices above are cash price, as negotiated for third party project financing for
an initial order in 1999 of >***
When a full working 4F TN-64X ADM is ordered, two of the four aggregates and
two of the receivers are to be included in the total price at ***
Price of workarounds to be covered by Nortel as per agreed commitments
Corrective maintenance - review of services cost will take place on annual
basis, discount structure as follows;
Total network build < *** corrective maintenance prices as above
Network build >*** < *** 10% price reduction on this portion
Network build >*** further 10% on this portion
Non-OEM prices are subject to a price decay of 7% p.a, starting 12 months
from contract signature date
Prices are based on finance arranged between CCG and Nortel through a third
party (i.e. not Nortel vendor financing)
FLM and TAS - Yr. 2000 charge for network ***. After a period of one year a
review of use and efficiency will take place in order to align price.
Integration of network into INM - a flat charge of *** to be paid for
initial 1999 build, price per element to be agreed for subsequent orders.
20 September 1999 CAE
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
FUTURE FEATURE AND PRODUCT PRICING FOR PAN-GERMAN NETWORK BUILD,
LAMBDANET
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITEM ORDER CODE ▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇
TN-64X ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ***
I&C for STM-16 trib card ***
TN-16XE quad 1e trib NTEU16KA ***
I&C for STM-1e quad card ***
TN-64X Quad STM-1 ***
I&C for STM-1e quad card ***
TN-64X 16*STM-1e trib card ***
I&C for 16*STM-1e trib card ***
OPTERA 1600G
Dual 2.5Gbit/s transponder card for use with channel combiner NTCA30CK ***
I&C for dual 2.5Gbit/s transponder card ***
FLM for dual port 2.5Gbit/s transponder card ***
TAS for dual port 2.5Gbit/s transponder card ***
10Gbit/s Channel combiner NTCA06xK ***
I&C for 10Gbit/s channel combiner ***
FLM for 10Gbit/s channel combiner ***
TAS for 10Gbit/s channel combiner ***
10Gbit/s regen card NTCA04xK ***
I&C for 10Gbit/s regen card ***
FLM for 10Gbit/s regen card ***
TAS for 10Gbit/s regen card ***
10G Wavelength Translator NTCA07xx ***
I&C for 10Gbit/s Wavelength Translator ***
FLM for 10Gbit/s Wavelength Translator ***
TAS for 10Gbit/s Wavelength Translator ***
Wavelength Combiner Timing card NTCA21AA ***
C BAND
Module 1 Pre Amp (8 wavelengths) NTCA15CA ***
Module 2 Booster (20 wavelengths) NTCA15CE ***
Module 3 Booster (40 wavelengths) NTCA15CH ***
C Band RTU ***
I&C for Module 1-3 Pre Amp ***
FLM for Module 1 Pre Amp ***
TAS for Module 1 Pre Amp ***
FLM for Module 2 Booster ***
TAS for Module 2 Booster ***
FLM for Module 3 Booster ***
TAS for Module 3 Booster ***
L BAND
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
Module 1 Pre Amp (8 wavelengths) ***
Module 2 Booster (20 wavelengths) ***
Module 3 Booster (40 wavelengths) ***
L Band RTU ***
I&C for Module 1-3 Pre Amp ***
FLM for Module 1 Pre Amp ***
TAS for Module 1 Pre Amp ***
FLM for Module 2 Booster ***
TAS for Module 2 Booster ***
FLM for Module 3 Booster ***
TAS for Module 3 Booster ***
INTERLEAVING FILTER 300/150 (28 WAVELENGTH)
C-Band NTCA15FA ***
L-Band ***
INTERLEAVING FILTER 100/50 (80 WAVELENGTH)
C-Band ***
L-Band ***
Bi-directional OSC 1510/1480nm NTCA15BK ***
C/L splitter (SC) NTCA15GH ***
CONSULTANCY/POST CONTRACT
Man hour price for technician (including travel within Germany) *** Man hour
price for engineer (including travel within Germany) ***
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exact codes and descriptions of cards subject to change
Above prices subject to final negotiation
Consultancy prices dependant upon total number of hours required
-----------------------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
PRICE LIST FOR PAN-GERMAN NETWORK BUILD CAE, LAMBDANET
ITEM ORDER NUMBER ▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇
CABLES, DDF, ODF
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on FC/PC 1m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on FC/PC 2m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on FC/PC 5m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on FC/PC 10m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on FC/PC 15m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on FC/PC 20m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on E2000 1m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on E2000 2m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on E2000 5m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on E2000 10m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on E2000 15m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on E2000 20m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on SC/PC 1m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on SC/PC 2m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on SC/PC 5m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on SC/PC 10m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on SC/PC 15m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. FC/PC on SC/PC 20m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on SC/PC 1m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on SC/PC 2m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on SC/PC 5m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on SC/PC 10m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on SC/PC 15m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on SC/PC 20m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on E2000 1m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on E2000 2m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on E2000 5m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on E2000 10m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on E2000 15m ***
Optical fibre cable 9/125 1 E1V(ZN) H Simpl. SC/PC on E2000 20m ***
Coaxial cable Type 43/Type 1.6_5.6 75 OHM for 155 Mbit 1m ***
Coaxial cable Type 43/Type 1.6_5.6 75 OHM for 155 Mbit 2m ***
Coaxial cable Type 43/Type 1.6_5.6 75 OHM for 155 Mbit 5m ***
Coaxial cable Type 43/Type 1.6_5.6 75 OHM for 155 Mbit 10m ***
Coaxial cable Type 43/Type 1.6_5.6 75 OHM for 155 Mbit 15m ***
Coaxial cable Type 43/Type 1.6_5.6 75 OHM for 155 Mbit 20m ***
TN-16XE STM-1e cable 32YCN00752BFA ***
TN-1X 2Mbs TX cable P0874820 ***
TN-1X 2Mbs RX cable P0874814 ***
TN-1C 2Mbs TX cable P0874821 ***
TN-1C 2Mbs RX cable P0874815 ***
Optical fibre cable adjustable attenuator. With test line for electrical ***
adjustment including mounting of connectors, optionally SC,FC/PC
attenuation factor >/- 20dB. Version 9/125
20 September 1999 CAE
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
DDF/ODF
Distribution frame ***
Distribution frame section 2-row 1800 mm ***
Distribution frame section 2-row 1000 mm ***
Coupler unit panel electrical 4x2 Type 1.6/5.6 (DDF 75 OHM) ***
Coupler unit panel optical 6x2 E2000/APC (ODF) ***
Splice box ***
LSA section for shielded routing 8xabs 2Mbit ***
LSA section 8 DA for alarm cabling ***
Subrack 19"/ 4HM or 7SU with sectional bars and integrated patch 6690 1 371-00 ***
cable routing, H = 175 mm, D = 183 mm
Mounting dimensions: metric = 515 mm or 19-inch = 465
Vt COM - 2 Mbit/coax/Gf - basic frame as wall-mounted upright distribution 6971 1 201-00 ***
frame, B x D x H = 540 x 300 x 2.200 mm consisting of 2 rows of sectional bars.
For mounting LSA modules and/or assemblies SubD/coax/ Gf. The basic frames can
be mounted next to each other or back-to-back. Delivered partly preassembled.
Back-to-back - threaded connection 6971 2 420-00 ***
1x per upright frame - two-sided (2 basic frames)
Frame end assembly kit Vt COM - one-sided 6971 2 210-00 ***
required 1x per one-sided row of frames
Frame end assembly kit Vt COM - two-sided 6971 2 212-00 ***
required 1x per two-sided row of frames
Coaxial module 4x2 - 1.6/5.6 7013 2 001-00 ***
for max. 8x coaxial coupler units Type 1.6/5.6 DIN 47 295, for snap-on
mounting on sectional bars, distribution frame, snap-on dimension = 100 mm
Coax housing coupler unit Type 1.6/5.6 DIN 47 295, 75Ohm straight, with 7013 2 906-00 ***
threaded connection for cable type 02Y (St)CY - 0.45/2.0, crimping of outer
conductor and Loters of inner conductor, partly assembled
Gf-module 6 x 2 for max. 12 Gf-coupler units SC / E2000 7013 2 300-04 ***
for snap mounting on sectional bar of
distribution frame, snap-on dimension = 100 mm,
Gf-connection coupler unit Type : E2000/APC colour green 6824 2 300-20 ***
(with DTAG approval)
COMMERCIAL ARRANGEMENTS;
Items above are priced at a unit level for a high volume order. BofQ to be
provided with exact number of units required by CCG
Prices quoted cost of OEM + ▇▇▇▇-up by Nortel - Nortel accepts no
responsibility for changes in prices or incorrect information or inaccuracy
by supplier
20 September 1999 CAE
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
PRODUCT PRICING TN-16X
SDH EQUIPMENT ALL IN DM MODEL PRICE
TN-16X
MODEL 1 TN16X RACK ***
NTE-STM16 RACK(2200 X 600 X 300) NTFW70EA 1 ***
TN-16X Installation Kit 25SKM00807ABM 1 ***
Rack Side Cover - Left Hand P0725173 1 ***
Rack Side Cover - Right Hand P0725175 1 ***
MODEL 2 TN16X DWDM ADM CORE ***
CORE
STM16 LTE/ADM/RING SHELF NTFW50EA ▇ ***
▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ (▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇) ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ 1 ***
Maintenance Interface Unit NT7E23AA 1 ***
▇▇-▇▇/▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ 2 ***
AGGREGATES -
OC-48 DWDM 1535.04 NM RING TX NT8E11MS 1 ***
OC-48 DWDM 1557.36 NM RING TX NT8E11TT 1 ***
OC-48/STM16 LR SAW Rx Interface (SC) NT8E02DE 2 ***
SYNCHRONISATION -
External synchronisation interface carrier NT7E19AA 1 ***
External Synchronisation Interface (2 M Hz) NTFW27AA 2 ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
Optical Patch Cord SC (20m) NT7E46FD 4 ***
KIT, SC OPTICAL CONNECTOR. INITIAL USE NTN401AA. NTN459SC 2 ***
SOFTWARE
TN-16X Shared Protection Ring Software Licence (Release 7) NTQJ93HG 1 ***
MANAGEMENT (LICENCES)
LICENSES DEALT WITH SEPARATELY
MODEL 3 TN-16X POST AMP SUBRACK ***
AGGREGATES
18dBm OPTICAL AMPLIFIER ETSI SUBRACK NTW048AB 1 ***
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER INSTALLATION KIT (1 AMP) NTFW72XX 2 ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
D.C . DISTRIBUTION PANEL ASSY NTFW62AA ▇ ***
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ (20m) NT7E46FD 2 ***
ALARM CABLE OP-AMP (4) 15 WAY D TYPE NTFW5748 1 ***
LOCKING POWER CABLE ADAPTER (OPTICAL AMPLIFIER) NTFW56EA 1 ***
MODEL 4 TN-16X POST & PRE AMP SUBRACK ***
AGGREGATES
FILTER - FIBRE OPTIC 1557nm (OP-AMP CONN) NTFW57PB 1 ***
18dBm OPTICAL AMPLIFIER ETSI SUBRACK NTW048AB 1 ***
TYPE 119 SUB RACK EDFA 9DBM (C33 FC/SPC CONNECTORS NTW048FB 1 ***
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER INSTALLATION KIT (1 AMP) NTFW72XX 1 ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
D.C . DISTRIBUTION PANEL ASSY NTFW62AA ▇ ***
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ (20m) NT7E46FD 4 ***
ALARM CABLE OP-AMP (4) 15 WAY D TYPE NTFW5748 1 ***
LOCKING POWER CABLE ADAPTER (OPTICAL AMPLIFIER) NTFW56EA 1 ***
MODEL 5 TN-16X STM-1O TRIBUTARY ***
TRIBUTARIES
STM1o IR 1310 Tributary I/F (SC) NTFW11CD 1 ***
STM1 Optical Carrier Assembly NTFW19BA 1 ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
Fibre Optic Cable Assy STM1 Duplex SC-SC 20M NTFW5753 2 ***
MODEL 6 TN-16X STM-4 TRIBUTARY ***
TRIBUTARIES
OC-12 IR INTERFACE NT7E02PB 1 ***
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
Optical Patch Cord SC (20m) NT7E46FD 2 ***
KIT, SC OPTICAL CONNECTOR. INITIAL USE NTN401AA. NTN459SC 1 ***
MODEL 7 TN-16X OPC ***
MANAGEMENT (HARDWARE)
-----------------------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
OPC with tape drive NT7E24BC 1 ***
MANAGEMENT (SOFTWARE)
PHOENIX SUPERSET CODE FOR REL 7.1 NTFW97HB 1 ***
CABLES
***Ethernet kit for OPC hub (20m,OC-48) NT7E44JE 1 ***
MODEL 8 TN-16X DWDM REGEN ******
SH PROCESSOR (ETHERNET,SYNC MSG 24M) NT7E20KA 1 ***
Maintenance Interface Unit NT7E23AA 1 ***
*** OPTICAL PATCH CORD 20M (SC-SC) NT7E46FD 4 ***
OC-48/STM16 LR SAW Rx Interface (SC) NT8E02DD 2 ***
OC-48 DWDM 1535.04 NM REGEN TX NT8E13ML 1 ***
OC-48 DWDM 1557.36 NM REGEN TX NT8E13TM 1 ***
TN-16X Regenerator Subrack Kit NTFW51AA ▇ ***
▇▇▇, ▇▇ OPTICAL CONNECTOR. INITIAL USE NTN401AA. NTN459SC 2 ***
TN-16X Regenerator Software Licence (Release 7) NTQJ93GG 1 ***
FW TN-16X Rel 7 NTPS (CD-ROM) NTFW64AH 1 ***
RACKS
-----
TN-16X Installation Kit 25SKM00807ABM 1 ***
REGEN RACK ASSY. NTFW71AA 1 ***
MODEL 28 INM LICENCES TN-16X ADM ******
INMCORE INCL FM-NE_TN16X RTU NTNM23BAAE 1 ***
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT - NE_TN-16X RTU NTNM31BDAE 1 ***
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT - NE_TN-16X RTU NTNM23BCAE 1 ***
TRAIL MANAGEMENT - NE_TN-16X RTU NTNM12BAAE 1 ***
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ - ▇▇_▇▇-▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ 1 ***
TRAIL SCHEDULE - NE_TN-16X RTU NTNM12BCAE 1 ***
MODEL 29 INM LICENSES TN-16X REGEN ******
INMCORE INCL FM-NE_TN16X RTU NTNM23BAAE 1 ***
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT - NE_TN-16X RTU NTNM31BDAE 1 ***
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT - NE_TN-16X RTU NTNM23BCAE 1 ***
-----------
* Omitted and filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission
pursuant to a request for confidential treatment.
ANNEX 2, CHAPTER 1 LIST OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL FEATURES
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FEATURES READY FOR PENALTY
TYPE
ACCEPTANCE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. DWDM REGENERATOR CARDS for initial implementation DWDM systems regenerate the Te1 2 million DM
optical line signals of transmission rate 10 Gbit/s by opto-electrical conversion
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. CHANNEL COMBINER for initial implementation DWDM systems multiplex up to four STM-16 Te2 5 million DM
signals in an optical line channel and vice versa.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. TRIBUTARY INTERFACES for the TN-64X system permit the setup, transfer and monitoring Te3 5 million DM
of four bi-directional STM-4 signals (without trib.- trib. interconnection).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The INM CORBA INTERFACE permits the export of performance data, trail routing data, Te4 2 million DM
network inventory data and alarm data from the network management system
INM to a third-party system.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. STM-16 TRANSLATOR INTERFACES for initial implementation DWDM systems fulfil the Te5 5 million DM
technical requirements in accordance with Annex 2 - System Feature
Description Optical Line Terminal (16 wave lengths)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. STM-16 TRANSLATOR INTERFACES for initial implementation DWDM systems fulfil the Te6 5 million DM
technical requirements in accordance with Annex 2 - System Feature
Description Optical Line Terminal (32 wave lengths)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. UNITS INTERFACES FOR TN-16XE permit the transmission of an optical STM-16 signal and Te7 5 million DM
non-blocking setup, transmission and monitoring of bi-directional
connections between units interfaces as well as between units and
tributary interfaces.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. TRIBUTARY INTERFACES for TN-16XE and TN-4XE systems permit the transmission of an Te8 2 million DM
optical STM-4 signal and non-blocking setup, transmission and monitoring of
bi-directional connections between tributary interfaces as well as
between units and tributary interfaces.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. TRIBUTARY INTERFACES for TN-64XE systems permit the transmission of FOUR OPTICAL Te9 1 million DM
STM-1 signals and non-blocking setup, transmission and monitoring of bi-directional
connections between tributary interfaces as well as between units and
tributary interfaces on VC-4 level.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. TRIBUTARY INTERFACES for TN-64XE systems permit the transmission of FOUR ELECTRICAL Te10 1 million DM
STM-1 signals and non-blocking setup, transmission and monitoring of bi-directional
connections between tributary interfaces as well as between units and
tributary interfaces on VC-4 level.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. TRIBUTARY INTERFACES for TN-64XE AND TN-4XE systems permit the transmission of FOUR Te11 5 million DM
ELECTRICAL STM-1 signals and non-blocking setup, transmission and monitoring of
bi-directional connections between tributary interfaces as well as
between units and tributary interfaces on VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12 levels.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. A 40-CHANNEL NORTEL DWDM SYSTEM can be set up in parallel to the 16-channel system Te12 5 million DM
used for initial implementation and can be operated in parallel for transmission via
the same fibres.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. STM-64 TRANSPONDER INTERFACES permit the connection of systems of other Te13 5 million DM
manufacturers via S-64 interface (STM-64)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANNEX 2
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 1
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 4.1
Item No.: 1,2,3,4,5,10,11,12
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Graphical User Interface for EMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The element managers for the proposed SDH multiplexer equipment, OPC and EC-1,
are used according to the TMN modell to manage the Nes efficiently and providing
the element specific managmentcapabilities an upper layer pathmanagement system,
the INM system, makes use of. All operational actions and information is
accessible from the Pathmanagement platform INM. Hence, there is no need for the
operator to use the Element Controller directly as the INM provides a common
English GUI for all integrated equipment to be managed. Out of this reason the
EC-1 and OPC themselves provide UNIX-based textual user-interfaces.
As all the systems are Unix-based the keyboard doesn't support the special
German characters and consonants. Therefore it is not possible to enter German
characters.
The GUI of INM allows hierarchical views on the network including background
graphics icons and easy-to-use point-and click operation. Alarms are graphically
visible and counters for acknoledged, non-acknoledged and alarm severity are
available at the INM GUI.
As conclusion the usage of the element controllers in the absence of the
pathmanagement system INM doesn't is possible but only in combination with the
INM GUI all available and required functionality can be provided. Therefore
refer also to the compliance statements provided for the NMS-Pathmanagement
questions representing the capabilities of the INM system.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
LICENSES AND SOFTWARE PEC DESCRIPTION
MOR RTU NTCA62DA 1 per Network Element with MOR+ units
& 1 per Maintaince Interface
TN-64X APPLICATION - 4F SPRING NTQJ93TC 1 per TN-64X Network Element in ADM configuration
TN-64X APPLICATION - REGENERATOR / MOR NTQJ93TD 1 per Regenerator or Network Element housing
MOR+ units
INM Core Management RTU - MOR NTNM23BAAN One per MOR+ when using INM
INM Inventory Management RTU - MOR NTNM31BDAN One per MOR+ when using INM
INM Core Management RTU - TN-64X NTNM23BAAG One per TN-64X when using INM
INM Performance Management RTU - TN-64X NTNM23BCAG One per TN-64X when using INM
INM Inventory Management RTU - TN-64X NTNM31BDAG One per TN-64X when using INM
INM Trail Manager RTU - TN-64X NTNM12BAAG One per TN-64X when using INM
INM CORE MANAGEMENT RTU TN-16XE NTNM23BAAM Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Performance MANAGEMENT RTU TN-16XE NTNM23BCAM Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Inventory MANAGEMENT RTU TN-16XE NTNM31BDAM Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Trail Manager RTU TN-16XE NTNM12BAAM Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM CORE MANAGEMENT RTU TN-4XE NTNM23BAAD Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Performance MANAGEMENT RTU TN-4XE NTNM23BCAD Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Inventory MANAGEMENT RTU TN-4XE NTNM31BDAD Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Trail Manager RTU TN-4XE NTNM12BAAD Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Core Management RTU - TN-1X NTNM23BAAC Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Performance Management RTU - TN-1X NTNM23BCAC Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Inventory Management RTU - TN-1X NTNM31BDAC Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Trail Manager RTU - TN-1X NTNM12BAAC Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Core Management RTU - TN-1C NTNM23BAAB Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Performance Management RTU - TN-1C NTNM23BCAB Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Inventory Management RTU - TN-1C NTNM31BDAB Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Trail Manager RTU - TN-1C NTNM12BAAB Always required. One per NE when using EC-1
INM Broadband RTU NTNM51AA One per Network utilising INMs
INM External Alarm Interface RTU NTNM51AB One per Network if external alarm interfaces
are used with INM
INM Resilient Platform RTU NTNM23AG One per additional resilent INM platform
20 September 1999
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 07.1
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 1
Item No.: 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 e
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quad card currently e/0 2000, potential improvement under investigation
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTICAL LINE TERMINAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-RFX-0006
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description Optical Line Terminal-10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 ABBREVIATIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INTRODUCTION This section lists abbreviation used throughout the entire
document.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUI Attachment Unit Interface
BBE Background Block Error
EBER Excessive Bit Error Rate
EMS Element Management System
ES Errored Second
ES-IS End System - Intermediate System routing
IP Internet Protocol
IS-IS Intermediate System routing
ITU-T International Telecommunications Union -
Telecommunications Sector
LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOS Loss Of Signal
MAU Media Attachment Unit
MDI Miscellaneous Discrete Input
MDO Miscellaneous Discrete Output
MIB Management Information Base
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OSC Optical Service Channel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSS Operation Support System
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
RS Regenerator Section
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SES Severely Errored Second
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SQL Structured Query Language
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
UAS Unavailable Second
UDP User Datagram Protocol
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 REQUESTED FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 TRANSMISSION FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier provides a link/hop NC
planning tool allowing to simulate and
design the DWDM network (Attenuation,
Dispersion,..).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The supplier provides a released C - This can be IR IR
document containing system planning and made available
engineering rules based on standard if required
single mode fibres.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRANSMISSION INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Connector Type E2000 APC FC & SC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1 INTERFACES CARRYING N X LAMBDAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Maximum output power of the interfaces 50W IR IR
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. link/hop limits (attenuation, 5 hops, total IR IR
dispersion,..) as function of number and combined
lengths of hops between terminals. distance of
380km with
maximum overall
Db loss of 95Db
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Automatic output power adjustment C
depending on the number of
received channels
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.2 TRANSPONDERS AND TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Optical interface I-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Optical interface S-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Optical interface L-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Optical interface L-16.2 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Bitrate independent interface NC, however it
is possible to
multiplex any
bitrate signal
presented to
the optical
layer using
Nortel's ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Optical Power Budget without 1 span = 27 IR IR
transponders 2 spans = 25 Db
3 spans = 23 Db
4 spans = 21 Db
5 spans = 19 Db
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Active wavelength control C
(not only via chip temperature)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Transmit transponders optional for NC - Nortel's
tributary channels SDH ADMs feed
(option to use output signals from their signal
coloured transmitters without need to directly into
implement transponders) the OADM
without need
for transponders
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Receive transponders optional for NC - see above
tributary channels
(option to apply DEMUX output signal to
SDH-receiver)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 100 GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Max. number of optical channels 16 channels IR IR
supporting 32
wavelengths
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Min. number of optical channels 2 supporting 4 IR IR
wavelengths
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 50
GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Max. number of optical channels Nortel's IR IR
Optical equipment
follows the ITU-T
recommended 200Ghz grid
with 100Ghz spacing as
defined in G.692
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Min. number of optical channels See above IR IR
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 STM-64 COMPATIBILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. It is possible to upgrade channels from Equipment will
STM-16 to STM-64 without need to change initially be
hardware. provisioned to
support STM-64
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.4 OTHER TRANSMISSION FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Dispersion compensation C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Automatic gain control C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. A channel upgrade is not traffic See response to
affecting to all 1.3.1
channels already in service
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Forward error correction C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 FUNCTIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Selective Call C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Conference Call (up to four participants) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- F- Interface (RS 232) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Qecc Routing (2 level IS-IS) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Q I/F (Ethernet) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Optical Supervisory Channel C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. OSC Integrated OSC IR IR
- wavelength at 1510nm or
- bitrate separate module
- optical span limit operating at
- transmission protocol 1625nm
operating at
10Gbit/s with a
limit of 5 spans
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 O & M INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 8 x Remote Control Inputs NC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remote Control Outputs C - However
Management
Performance may
be reduced
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Card LED support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Subrack LED support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Rack Alarm support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. B1 Performance Monitoring on Transponder Transponder
Unit Unit not used
in this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 15 min Performance History Data C - extensive
Collection from each Regenerator performance
Section Monitoring Point (ES, SES and monitoring is
UAT). available as
part of
Nortel's INM
network
management
platform
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 24 h Performance History Data Collection See response to
from each Regenerator Section Monitoring 4.2 above
Point (ES, SES and UAT).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 15 min Performance History Log for more See response to
than 100 intervals 4.2 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 24 h Performance History Log for more See response to
than 30 intervals 4.2 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Performance Monitoring Threshold See response to
Crossing Notification 4.2 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Laser Restart for Test C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Laser Shutdown C - alarms are
raised if for
whatever reason
a loss of
signal occurs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of disabled ALS on any See response to
optical interface 6.2.1.9
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of Optical Source Power C
High on any optical interface
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of LOS, LOS status change C - Loss of
hysteresis Signal is
reported
through the use
of alarms based
upon input and
output signal
thresholds.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of number of received channels C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Monitoring of laser current for pump C
laser 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Monitoring of laser current for pump C
laser 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Monitoring of temperature for pump laser C
1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Monitoring of temperature for pump C
laser 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Monitoring of laser temperature C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Monitoring of transmitted wavelength C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Monitoring of received input power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Monitoring of transmitted output power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Detection of coupler temperature high C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Detection of grating temperature high C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of OOF NC - At an
Optical
Terminal site,
regen section
is monitored by
the SDH ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of LOF See response to
5.1.2.1 above
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on See response to
B1 BIP-8 parity calculation 5.1.2.1 above
on demux unit
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on See response to
B1 BIP-8 parity calculation on 5.1.2.1 above
transponder unit
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Section Trace Mismatch See response to
based on J0 Byte monitoring on demux unit 5.1.2.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of Section Trace Mismatch Transponder
based on J0 Byte monitoring on Unit not used in
transponder unit this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of Remote Control Input Active C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of OSC Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.4 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of Secondary Power Fail See response to
8.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Primary Power Low See response to
8.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of Primary Power Fail per See response to
each single power feed 8.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of Configuration Data C
Integrity Check Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Detection of System Software Integrity C
Check Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Detection of Network Element Controller C
Fail
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Detection of Card Protection Switch C
Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Detection of Card Out C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection C
of internal parity mismatch etc.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Detection of Wrong Card C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Network Protection Switch Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Optical Layer Protection Switch Active
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Card Protection Switch Active C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Configuration Data Transaction Log C
Capacity Exceeded
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity C
Exceeded
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Software Download in Progress C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Software Download Failure C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Software Download Failure - Retry in C
Progress
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Software Download Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. Card Restoration Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. Electronic Label Update C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of C - It is
toggling alarms) possible to
filter alarms
using the
functionality
of INM,
Nortel's
Network
Management
System
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, C
suppression of consequent alarms)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Alarm Inversion Facility C - It is
possible to
invert alarms
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Performance of the alarm throughput C
greater than 10 alarms per second
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding NC
Suppression per functional unit (e.g.
Regenerator Section ...)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Upload of Configuration Data - on single C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set of transmitted output power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Set of input power warning thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Set input power switch off thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Set output power warning thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Set output power switch off thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Set laser current alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Set of laser temperature alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set of transmitted wavelength alarm C
thresholds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser NC - The OPTera
Shutdown according to ITU-T G.958 LH is a Class
3A system. Whilst not
advised, a Class 3A
system is deemed to be
safe for long term
viewing without optical
aids and with the
supplied warning labels
and procedural
precautions, ALS is not
necessary for this
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Enable / Disable Laser C - it is
possible to
enable/disable
the laser both
manually and
remotely
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Enable Laser for Test Purposes
(2s / NC 90s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set Threshold B1-EBER NC -At an
Optical
Terminal site,
regen section
is monitored by
the SDH ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 NETWORK PROTECTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 OPTICAL MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION
(OMSP)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. OMSP function NC - Nortel However,
believes that Nortel also
in today's believes that
networks where optical
SDH protection
multiplexers switching
are already offers
required for benefits for
traffic demands
aggregation and carried on
bandwidth individual
management it optical
is more cost channels,
effective to Optical
put the protection
protection switching of
switching in this type is
the SDH layer only viable if
deployed with
appropriate
solutions for
the monitoring
and management
of the optical
domain
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Switch-Over Completion Time less See response to
than 50ms 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Manual Switching via Management See response to
Interface 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Configurable Wait Time to Restore See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 WAVELENGTH SELECTIVE PROTECTION SWITCHING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Wavelength selective Subnetwork See response to
Connection Protection 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Switch-Over Completion Time less See response to
than 50ms 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Manual Switching via Management See response to
Interface 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Configurable Wait Time to Restore See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Event buffer C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Heart Beat Function for all processes NC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Automatic Re-boot after power failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Real time clock function C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Automatic synchronization of NE real C
time clock on EMS real time clock
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. It is possible to set the NE time and C
date via EMS/LCT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. NSAP Address modification C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Local Software Download C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Remote Software Download C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Upload of configuration data to EMS/LCT C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Download of configuration data from C
EMS/LCT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Manager Decision Process for equipment C
access control
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 LOGS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Alarm / Status Log C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Performance Log (storage capacity at C
least 8 x 15 min intervals and 30 x 24 h
interval for each monitoring point)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Configuration Log (storage capacity at C
least 24 h)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Access Control Log (storage capacity at C
least 10 days)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 REDUNDANCY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Dual Power Feed C - standard 2
power feeds,
optional 6
power feeds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 1+1 Protection of Power Supply The OPTera
system is
powered by
redundant
feeds. Failure
of one of the
power feeds due
to an open or
short circuit
does not affect
the system. Two
breaker/filter
modules provide
power for the
OPtera shelves.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Redundancy of pump lasers C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C - managed
via the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Integrity Check of System Software See response to
8.4.1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Configuration of Loop Back on all NC
optical Interface Cards
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Optical monitoring port on each Transponder
transmit transponder (output signal) Unit not used
in this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Optical monitoring port on each receive Transponder
transponder (input signal) Unit not used
in this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Optical monitoring port on each C - managed
pre-amplifier (input signal) via the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Optical monitoring port on each C - managed
booster-amplifier (output signal) via the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.5 INVENTORY DATA
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Electronic Label Read Access via Nortel's INM Network
Management Interfaces Management system offers
the option of
centralised inventory
management, which is
accessed via the GNB and
allows the user to
retrieve an inventory of
the remotely located
NEs. The retrieved
information can be
displayed and saved to a
file suitable for
further processing
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade See response to
8.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Compatibility Check of Equipment See response to
Hardware Releases 8.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Compatibility Check of Equipment See response to
Firmware Releases 8.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Compatibility Check of Equipment Management by release
Software Releases automatically defines a
set of compatible
software loads (called
the software lineup) for
all downloadable CPs in
a span of control and
enforces strict software
configuration management
among these loads.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Compatibility Check of Equipment Management by release
Software Releases to the Management automatically
System defines a set of
compatible software
loads (called the
software lineup) for all
downloadable CPs in a
span of control and
enforces strict software
configuration management
among these loads.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Electronic Label contents: See response to
- Unit hardware release / version 8.5.1 above
- Unit hardware serial number
- Unit firmware release / version
- Unit software release / version
- Unit installation date of unit/NE
- Production date of unit/NE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL
COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with Stationary Use C
Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3
Class T 3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. No need for air conditioning via C
elevated ground floor
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with EN 55022 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Compliance with EN 50082 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.3 SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CE certification available C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Electrical safety according to EN 41003 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. General requirements according to C
EN 60950 A1, A2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Fire and heat safety according to ETS C
300 019-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, C
600 mm x 300 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para T1 T2 T3 Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, N/A
600 mm x 600 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. System installation and h/w upgrade via C
front access possible
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Number of required Racks in minimum 1 1 1
configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Number of required Racks in maximum 1 IR IR
configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 POWER SUPPLY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Nominal input voltage -48V C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Minimum accepted input voltage -38V IR IR
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Maximum accepted input voltage -75V IR IR
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 AVAILABILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures C - see Annex 1 IR IR
for each functional unit of the offered
equipment based on his statistical
evaluations according to the template as
attached in Annex 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 POWER CONSUMPTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier shall provide worst case C - see Annex 1 IR IR
power consumption figures for each
functional unit of the offered equipment
according to the template as attached in
Annex 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 SYSTEM MANUALS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. System Description in Hypertext Format C -
on CD documentation
is available in
Adobe Acrobat
format
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format C -
on CD documentation
is available in
Adobe Acrobat
format
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT FIGURE MAXIMUM POWER
CONSUMPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANDATORY CONTROL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shelf Controller NTCA41BA 1125 13W/20W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Half Height Breaker NTCA40CA 256 5W/8W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance Interface NTCA42AA 1139 7.5W/10W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Message Transfer NTCA48AA 677 8W/10W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPTIONAL CONTROL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parallel Telemetry Interface NTCA45AA 703 2W/5W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AMPLIFIER/FILTER OPTIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOR+ Red Pre/ Blue Post with OSC NTCA11PK 4499 35W/50W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOR+ Blue Pre/Red Post with OSC NTCA11NK 4499 35W/50W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OSC NTCA11CA 1024 25W/40W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTICAL ADD/DROP MULTIPLEXER
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0005
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
----------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description Optical Add Drop Mux- 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
----------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 ABBREVIATIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
INTRODUCTION This section lists abbreviation used throughout the entire
document.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
AUI Attachment Unit Interface
BBE Background Block Error
EBER Excessive Bit Error Rate
EMS Element Management System
ES Errored Second
ES-IS End System - Intermediate System routing
IP Internet Protocol
IS-IS Intermediate System routing
ITU-T International Telecommunications Union -
Telecommunications Sector
LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOS Loss Of Signal
MAU Media Attachment Unit
MDI Miscellaneous Discrete Input
MDO Miscellaneous Discrete Output
MIB Management Information Base
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OSC Optical Service Channel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSS Operation Support System
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
RS Regenerator Section
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SES Severely Errored Second
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SQL Structured Query Language
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
UAS Unavailable Second
UDP User Datagram Protocol
----------------------------------------------------------------------
2 REQUESTED FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 TRANSMISSION FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier provides a link/hop NC
planning tool allowing to simulate and
design the DWDM network (Attenuation,
Dispersion,..).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The supplier provides a released C - This can be
document containing system planning and made available
engineering rules based on standard if required
single mode fibres.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRANSMISSION INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Connector Type E2000 APC FC & SC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1 INTERFACES ACCYING N X LAMBDAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Maximum output power of the interfaces 50W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. OADM link/hop limits (attenuation, 5 hops. total
dispersion,..) as function of number combined
and lengths of hops between terminals. distance of
380km with
maximum
overall Db
loss of 95Db
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Automatic output power adjustment C
depending on the number of
received channels
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. N x lambda interface on tributary side C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.2 TRANSPONDERS AND TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Optical interface I-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Optical interface S-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Optical interface L-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Optical interface L-16.2 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Bitrate independent interface NC, however it
is possible to
multiplex any
bitrate signal
presented to
the optical
layer using
Nortel's ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Optical Power Budget without transponders 1 span = 27 Db IR IR
2 spans = 25 Db
3 spans = 23 Db
4 spans = 21 Db
5 spans = 19 Db
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Active wavelength control (not only via C
chip temperature)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Transmit transponders optional for NC - Nortel's
tributary channels SDH ADMs feed
(option to use output signals from their signal
coloured transmitters without need to directly into
implement transponders) the OADM
without need
for
transponders
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Receive transponders optional for NC - see above
add/drop channels
(option to apply DEMUX output signal to
SDH-receiver)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 100 GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Max. number of optical channels 8 channels IR IR
aggregate east to agg. west supporting 16
wavelengths
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Min. number of optical channels 2 supporting 4 IR IR
aggregate west to agg. east wavelengths
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Max. number of optical channels 2 channels IR IR
added/dropped to/from direction east (2(lambda)
added,
2(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Min. number of optical channels 1 channel IR IR
added/dropped to/from direction east (1(lambda)
added,
1(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Max. number of optical channels 2 channels IR IR
added/dropped to/from direction west (2(lambda)
added,
2(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Min. number of optical channels 1 channel IR IR
added/dropped to/from direction west (1(lambda)
added,
1(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 50
GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Max. number of optical channels Nortel's
aggregate east to agg. west Optical
equipment
follows the
ITU-T
recommended
200Ghz grid
with 100Ghz
spacing as
defined in G.692
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Min. number of optical channels See response to
aggregate west to agg. east 1.2.9 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Max. number of optical channels See response to
added/dropped to/from direction east 1.2.9 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Min. number of optical channels See response to
added/dropped to/from direction east 1.2.9 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Max. number of optical channels See response to
added/dropped to/from direction west 1.2.9 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Min. number of optical channels See response to
added/dropped to/from direction west 1.2.9 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 STM-64 COMPATIBILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. It is possible to upgrade aggregate - Equipment will
aggregate channels from STM-16 to STM-64 initially be
without need to change hardware. provisioned to
support STM-64
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. It is possible to upgrade specific Equipment will
aggregate tributary channels from initially be
STM-16 to STM-64 is possible provisioned to
without affecting other channels. support STM-64
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.4 OTHER TRANSMISSION FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Dispersion compensation for aggregate - C
aggregate channels
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Automatic gain control C
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A aggregate - aggregate channel See
upgrade is not traffic affecting response to
to all channels already 1.3.1 & 1.3.2
in service
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A aggregate - tributary channel upgrade See
is not traffic affecting to all response to
channels already 1.3.1 & 1.3.2
in service
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Forward error correction C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 FUNCTIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Selective Call C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Conference Call (up to four participants) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. F- Interface (RS 232) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Qecc Routing (2 level IS-IS) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Q I/F (Ethernet) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Optical Supervisory Channel C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. OSC Integrated OSC IR IR
- wavelength at 1510nm or
- bitrate separate module
- optical span limit operating at
- transmission protocol 1625nm
operating at
10Gbit/s with a
limit of 5 spans
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 O & M INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 8 x Remote Control Inputs NC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Remote Control Outputs C - However
Management
Performance may
be reduced
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Card LED support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Subrack LED support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Rack Alarm support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. B1 Performance Monitoring on Transponder Transponder
Unit Unit not used
in this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 15 min Performance History Data C - extension
Collection from each Regenerator performance
Section Monitoring Point (ES, SES and monitoring is
UAT). available as
part of
Nortel's INM
network
management
platform
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 24 h Performance History Data Collection See response to
from each Regenerator Section Monitoring 4.2 above
Point (ES, SES and UAT).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. 15 min Performance History Log for more See response to
than 100 intervals 4.2 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. 24 h Performance History Log for more See response to
than 30 intervals 4.2 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Performance Monitoring Threshold See response to
Crossing Notification 4.2 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Laser Restart for Test C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Laser Shutdown C - alarms are
raised if for
whatever reason
a loss of
signal occurs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical See response to
interface 6.2.1.9
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of Optical Source Power High C
on any optical interface
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of LOS, LOS status change C - Loss of
hysteresis Signal is
reported
through the use
of alarms based
upon input and
output signal
thresholds.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Detection of number of received channels C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Monitoring of laser current for pump C
laser 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Monitoring of laser current for pump C
laser 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Monitoring of temperature for pump C
laser 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Monitoring of temperature for pump C
laser 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Monitoring of laser temperature C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Monitoring of transmitted wavelength C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Monitoring of received input power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Monitoring of transmitted output power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Detection of coupler temperature high C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Detection of grating temperature high C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of OOF NC - At an OADM
site, regen
section is
monitored by
the SDH ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of LOF See response to
5.1.2.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on See response to
B1 BIP-8 parity calculation on demux unit 5.1.2.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on See response to
B1 BIP-8 parity calculation on 5.1.2.1 above
transponder unit
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of Section Trace Mismatch See response to
based on J0 Byte monitoring on demux unit 5.1.2.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Detection of Section Trace Mismatch Transponder Unit
based on J0 Byte monitoring on not used in this
transponder unit solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of Remote Control Input Active C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of OSC Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.4 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of Secondary Power Fail See response to
8.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Primary Power Low See response to
8.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of Primary Power Fail per See response to
each single power feed 8.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of Configuration Data C
Integrity Check Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Detection of System Software Integrity C
Check Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Detection of Network Element Controller C
Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Detection of Card Protection Switch C
Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Detection of Card Out C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection C
of internal parity mismatch etc.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Detection of Wrong Card C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Network Protection Switch Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Optical Layer Protection Switch Active See response to
7.1.1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Card Protection Switch Active C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Configuration Data Transaction Log C
Capacity Exceeded
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity C
Exceeded
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Software Download in Progress C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Software Download Failure C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. Software Download Failure - Retry in C
Progress
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. Software Download Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. Card Restoration Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. Electronic Label Update C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of C - It is
toggling alarms) possible to
filter alarms
using the
functionality
of INM,
Nortel's
Network
Management
System
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, C
suppression of consequent alarms)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Alarm Inversion Facility C - It is possible
to invert alarms
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Performance of the alarm throughput C
>10 alarms per second
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding NC
Suppression per functional unit
(e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Upload of Configuration Data - on single C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set of transmitted output power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Set of input power warning thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Set input power switch off thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Set output power warning thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Set output power switch off thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Set laser current alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Set of laser temperature alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Set of transmitted wavelength alarm C
thresholds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser NC -
Shutdown according to The OPTera
ITU-T G.958 LH OADM is a
Class 3A system.
Whilst
not advised,
a Class 3A
system is deemed
to be safe for
long term viewing
without optical
aids and with the
supplied warning
labels and
procedural
precautions, ALS
is not necessary
for this equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Enable / Disable Laser C - it is
possible to
enable/disable
the laser both
manually and
remotely
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Enable Laser for Test Purposes NC
(2s / 90s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set Threshold B1-EBER NC -At an OADM
site, regen
section is
monitored by
the SDH ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 NETWORK PROTECTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 OPTICAL MULTIPLEX
SECTION PROTECTION (OMSP)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. OMSP function NC - Nortel However,
believes that Nortel also
in today's believes that
networks where optical
SDH protection
multiplexers switching
are already offers
required for benefits for
traffic demands
aggregation and carried on
bandwidth individual
management it optical
is more cost channels,
effective to Optical
put the protection
protection switching of
switching in this type is
the SDH layer only viable if
deployed with
appropriate
solutions for
the monitoring
and management
of the optical
domain
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN See response to
50ms 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Manual Switching via See response to
Management Interface 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Configurable Wait Time to Restore See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 WAVELENGTH SELECTIVE PROTECTION SWITCHING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Wavelength selective Subnetwork See response to
Connection Protection 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN See response to
50ms 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Manual Switching via Management See response to
Interface 7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Configurable Wait Time to Restore See response to
7.1.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Event buffer C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Heart Beat Function for all processes NC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Real time clock function C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Automatic synchronization of NE real C
time clock on EMS real time clock
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. It is possible to set the NE time and C
date via EMS/LCT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. NSAP Address modification C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Local Software Download C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Remote Software Download C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Upload of configuration data to EMS/LCT C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Download of configuration data from C
EMS/LCT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Manager Decision Process for equipment C
access control
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 LOGS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Alarm / Status Log C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Performance Log (storage capacity at C
least 8 x 15 min intervals and 30 x 24 h
interval for each monitoring point)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Configuration Log (storage capacity at C
least 24 h)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Access Control Log (storage capacity at C
least 10 days)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 REDUNDANCY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Dual Power Feed C - standard 2
power feeds,
optional 6
power feeds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 1+1 Protection of Power Supply The OPTera OADM
system is
powered by
redundant
feeds. Failure
of one of the
power feeds due
to an open or
short circuit
does not affect
the system. Two
breaker/filter
modules provide
power for the
OPtera OADM
shelves.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Redundancy of pump lasers C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C - managed via
the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Integrity Check of System Software See response to
8.4.1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Configuration of Loop Back on all NC
optical Interface Cards
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Optical monitoring port on each transmit Transponder
transponder (output signal) Unit not used
in this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Optical monitoring port on each receive Transponder
transponder (input signal) Unit not used
in this solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Optical monitoring port on each C - managed via
pre-amplifier (input signal) the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Optical monitoring port on each C - managed via
booster-amplifier (output signal) the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.5 INVENTORY DATA
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Electronic Label Read Access via Nortel's INM
Management Interfaces Network
Management system
offers the option
of centralised
inventory
management, which
is accessed via
the GNB and
allows the user to
retrieve an
inventory of
the remotely
located
NEs. The retrieved
information can be
displayed and saved
to a file suitable
for further
processing
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade See response to
8.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Compatibility Check of Equipment See response to
Hardware Releases 8.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Compatibility Check of Equipment See response to
Firmware Releases 8.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Compatibility Check of Equipment Management by
Software Releases release
automatically
defines a
set of compatible
software loads
(called the
software lineup)
for all
downloadable CPs
in a span of
control and
enforces strict
software
configuration
management
among these loads.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Compatibility Check of Equipment See response to
Software Releases to the Management 8.5.5 above
System
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Electronic Label contents: See response to
- Unit hardware release / version 8.5.1 above
- Unit hardware serial number
- Unit firmware release / version
- Unit software release / version
- Unit installation date of unit/NE
- Production date of unit/NE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS,
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY
AND SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with Stationary Use C
Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3
Class T 3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. No need for air conditioning via C
elevated ground floor
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with EN 55022 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Compliance with EN 50082 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.3 SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CE certification available C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Electrical safety according to C
EN 41003
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. General requirements according to C
EN 60950 A1, A2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Fire and heat safety according to ETS C
300 019-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 C
mm x 300 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 N/A
mm x 600 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. System installation and h/w upgrade via C
front access possible
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Number of required Racks in minimum 1 1 1
configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Number of required Racks in maximum 1 IR IR
configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 POWER SUPPLY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Nominal input voltage -48V C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Minimum accepted input voltage -38V
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Maximum accepted input voltage -75V
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 AVAILABILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures C - see Annex 1
for each functional unit of the offered
equipment based on his statistical
evaluations according to the template as
attached in Annex 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 POWER CONSUMPTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier shall provide worst case C - see Annex 1
power consumption figures for each
functional unit of the offered equipment
according to the template as attached in
Annex 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 SYSTEM MANUALS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. System Description in Hypertext Format C -
on CD documentation
is available in
Adobe Acrobat
format
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext C-
Format on CD documentation
is available in
Adobe Acrobat
format
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT FIGURE MAXIMUM POWER
CONSUMPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANDATORY CONTROL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shelf Controller NTCA41BA 1125 13W/20W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Half Height Breaker NTCA40CA 256 5W/8W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance Interface NTCA42AA 1139 7.5W/10W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Message Transfer NTCA48AA 677 8W/10W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPTIONAL CONTROL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parallel Telemetry Interface NTCA45AA 703 2W/5W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AMPLIFIER/FILTER OPTIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOR+ Red Pre/ Blue Post with OSC NTCA11PK 4499 35W/50W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOR+ Blue Pre/Red Post with OSC NTCA11NK 4499 35W/50W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OSC NTCA11CA 1024 25W/40W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ - ST-RFX-0005 - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA. 1.1
1.1 INTER-SHELF INTERCONNECTIONS
The various I/O of the OMX module, shown in Figure 1 is connectorized to provide
the interconnection flexibility required to support the various configurations
of OPTera. The OTS In and OTS Out interfaces generally interface the outside
plant fiber, although in some configurations they connect to other co-located
OPTera shelves. The Thru Out and Thru In interfaces carry all of the wavelength
bands except for the band being added/dropped by the module. These interfaces
can be accessed via a connector or a pigtail. The Channel 1-4 Drop and Add
pigtails carry the Drop and Add channels and are connected to the OCLD cards.
All connectors are SC/PC. The pigtail connectors to the OCLDs are FC/PC.
FIGURE 1. OMX I/O
When configured for a hubbed ring remote, the OPTera shelf is provisioned with
two OMX modules as shown in Figure 2. The wavelengths that are not added/dropped
by the node must be passed through optically. This is accomplished by connecting
the Thru Out pigtail from each OMX to the Thru In connector of the other OMX.
The pigtail is used in this case to avoid an additional connector loss.
FIGURE 2. HUBBED RING REMOTE CONFIGURATION
Page 1 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The hubbed ring hub and the point-to-point terminal are configured the same way.
These nodes typically consist of multiple nodes, each accessing a different
wavelength band. Figure 3 shows the intershelf interconnections. The incoming
facility fiber is connected to the OTS In port of the OMX on the first shelf,
which drops its band of wavelengths. The Thru Out is connected, via a patchcord,
to the OTS In of the OMX on the next shelf, which drops its band of wavelengths.
This continues until the last shelf has dropped its band of wavelengths. This
interconnection is identical on both the West and East sides of the shelves.
The OTS Out of the OMX on the first shelf, which contains the band of
wavelengths added by that shelf, is connected, via a patchcord, to Thru In port
of the OMX on the next shelf. This daisychain continues until the last shelf has
added its band of wavelengths. The OTS Out of the last shelf connects to the
outgoing fiber facility. This interconnection is identical on both the West and
East sides of the shelves.
This style of interconnection minimizes the add/drop insertion loss of the
point-to-point terminal and the hubbed ring hub. The main alternative is to
connect the East OTS In/Out to the West OTS Out/In of the next shelf; however,
the 8th shelf would experience the insertion loss of 7 additional OMX modules in
this case.
This style of interconnection does not have an optical passthrough path. This is
not required in the point-to-point terminal or the hubbed ring hub.
FIGURE 3. POINT-TO-POINT TERMINAL OR HUBBED RING HUB
Page 2 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To configure a point-to-point system, the OTS Out of the last shelf (`last'
referring to the daisy-chained interconnection described above) is connected to
the OTS In of the first shelf. This interconnection is identical for the A and B
sides.
FIGURE 4. POINT-TO-POINT SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
To configure a hubbed ring system, the West OTS Out of the last shelf in the hub
(`last' referring to the daisy-chained interconnection described above) is
connected to the West OTS In of the first remote. The West OTS Out of the first
remote is connected to the West OTS In of the first shelf in the hub. The East
OTS Out of a remote is connected to the West OTS In of the next remote and the
West OTS Out of that remote is connected to the East OTS In of the previous
remote.
In summary, the West side of the hub is connected to the West side of the first
remote and the East side of the hub is connected to the East side of the last
remote. The remotes are daisy-chained East side to West side.
FIGURE 5. HUBBED RING SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
Page 3 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA. 1.1.1
1.2 WAVELENGTH PLAN
OPTera wavelengths are organized into bands as shown in Figure 6 to facilitate
cost-effective add/drop/passthrough. Each band encompasses 4 wavelengths based
on a 200GHz spacing with central frequencies selected from the ITU 100GHz grid.
The center wavelength tolerance for OPTera lasers is +/- 0.25nm. This covers all
operating conditions, including the full ambient temperature range, laser aging,
and laser line broadening.
FIGURE 6. OPTERA WAVELENGTH ORGANIZATION
[GRAPHIC OMITTED]
TABLE 1. CHANNEL CENTRAL WAVELENGTHS
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
WAVELENGTH BAND CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
1 1528.77 1530.33 1531.90 1533.47
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
2 1538.19 1539.77 1541.35 1542.94
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
3 1547.72 1549.32 1550.92 1552.52
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
4 1557.36 1558.98 1560.61 1562.23
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
5 1567.13 1568.77 1570.42 1572.06
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
6 1577.03 1578.69 1580.35 1582.02
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
7 1587.04 1588.73 1590.41 1592.10
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
8 1597.19 1598.89 1600.60 1602.31
----------------------- --------------------- -------------------- --------------------- --------------------
1.3 CLIENT INTERFACES
The first release of OPTera includes 2 OCI circuit card types. The first is
optimized for 1310nm client signals up to 622Mb/s and meets the optical
parameter specifications for OC-3 and OC-12 short and intermediate reach
applications. The second is optimized for 1310nm client signals up to 1.25Gb/s
and meets the optical parameter specifications for Gigabit Ethernet, however
this card can also interface SONET OC-3 and OC-12 signals.
Page 4 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 2. OPTICAL CHANNEL INTERFACE TYPES
------------- ------------ --------------- ---------------- ---------------- ------------------
OCI MAX BIT FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR PROTOCOL NOMINAL
RATE WAVELENGTH
------------- ------------ --------------- ---------------- ---------------- ------------------
622M 622Mb/s SMF SC Transparent 1310nm
------------- ------------ --------------- ---------------- ---------------- ------------------
1.25G 1.25Gb/s SMF & MMF SC Transparent 1310nm
------------- ------------ --------------- ---------------- ---------------- ------------------
OPTera is optimized for carrying OC-3 and OC-12 trunks between switching devices
and between end-users in metropolitan environments. OC-48 rates will be
supported in the future. There are currently no plans to support OC-192 rates,
however, such a rate is not precluded by the architecture.
The OPTera system will be transparent to subtending SONET equipment. All SONET
section, line and path layer overhead is passed through without modification.
SONET DCC channels, orderwire, APS signaling, pointers, etc., will all pass
through transparently such that the subtending SONET equipment will function as
if it is directly connected, including protection switching and synchronization
functions.
The following OCI cards are available in the first release of OPTera. Async FOTS
interfaces that are compatible with these specifications can be handled. Other
specifications can be considered based on the needs of the network provider.
TABLE 3. OPTICAL CHANNEL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
------------- ------------ --------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------------
OCI MAX BIT TX PWR MAX TX PWR MIN RX SENS (MIN) RX OVERLOAD WAVELENGTH
RATE
------------- ------------ --------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------------
622M 622Mb/s -15dBm -8dBm -28dBm -7dBm 1274nm-1356nm
------------- ------------ --------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------------
1.25G 1.25Gb/s -13dBm -3dBm -20dBm -3dBm 1270nm-1335nm
------------- ------------ --------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------------
TABLE 4. EXAMPLE CLIENT SIGNALS
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT INTERFACE TYPE FIBER OCI 622M DISTANCE OCI 1.25G DISTANCE (ASSUMES
TYPE (ASSUMES .5DB/KM) .5DB/KM)
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
OC-3/12 SR (155-622Mb/s) SMF 15km 8km
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
OC-3/12 IR (155-622Mb/s) SMF 25km 10km
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
ATM OC-3/12 (155-622Mb/s) MMF N/a 230m (dispersion limited)
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
Fast Ethernet (100Mb/s) SMF 15-30km Up to 22km
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
Gigabit Ethernet (1.25Gb/s) SMF N/a 3km (dispersion limited)
------------------------------------------ -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
Fiber Channel (up to 531Mb/s) SMF 10-20km 12-22km
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
Fiber Channel (1.06Gb/s) SMF N/a 3km (dispersion limited)
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
ESCON/SBCON (200Mb/s) SMF 25km 24km
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
FDDI (100Mb/s) SMF 15-30km Up to 22km
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
Other MMF N/a 230m (dispersion limited)
------------------------------------------- -------- -------------------------- -----------------------------
Page 5 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA. 1.1.3 (3)
1.3.1 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
OPTera performance management includes the monitoring of Optical Power Received
(OPR), Optical Power Transmitted (OPT), and Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) on a per
wavelength basis. This information is used to derive threshold crossing alerts
that can be used to trigger pre-emptive maintenance action and recorded for
subsequent trend analysis. Reports of these events are available at the network
element through the SMI/EMS. Active TCAs are reported in the Alarm Browser of
the System Manager Interface. TCAs events are timestamped and recorded in the
Event Log of the System Manager Interface.
There are two thresholds defined for each parameter. The first threshold is a
Degrade Threshold, indicating that the parameter being monitored is degraded and
potentially experiencing bit errors. This TCA is reported, however, it does not
trigger protection switching. The second threshold is a Fail Threshold,
indicating that the parameter being monitored is severely degraded and traffic
is being impacted. This TCA is reported and triggers protection switching, if
available.
The TCA thresholds are not currently user settable. The thresholds are
calibrated to client signal BERs, and different thresholds are required for
different client signal bit-rates. Since OPTera offers the flexibility to carry
any bit-rate, Cambrian Systems believes that it would be unwieldy for the user
to have to set the thresholds for each bit-rate. However, a method of supporting
user adjustment of these thresholds is planned.
It is also planned to support end-to-end optical channel performance monitoring
using protocol-specific integrity mechanisms. For example, OPTera will monitor
on an end-to-end basis, the SONET Section Layer BIP-8 and provide performance
parameters and binning as requested. This includes Code Violations, Errored
Seconds, Severely Errored Seconds and Severely Errored Frame Seconds. Although
far-end parameters are not available at the SONET section layer, OPTera will
monitor these parameters on both incoming and outgoing clients signals in both
directions and report these via the OPTera EMS.
Page 6 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA 1.1-4
STM-16 TX/RX OPTICAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
1310 nm 1557 nm
Circuit pack PEC
FC connection NTCA20LA NTCE30KA
ST connector NTCA30LB NTCA20KB
SC connector NTCA30LC NTCA30KC
Line rate 2488.32 Mbit's 2488.32 Mbit's
Line code NRZ NRZ
ITU-T G.957 application code S-16.1 L-16.2
Altonuination range (see Note 4) ? dB to ? dB ? dB to ? dB
RECEIVER
GENERAL
Detector Avalanche photo-detector (APD)
Pigtail Single-mode
1310 nm 1557 nm
SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS
Wavelength of operation 1310 nm 1557 nm
OPTICAL SIGNAL
Guaranteed receiver sensitivity -25.6 dBm -25.6 dBm
Receiver overload level (see Note 1) -15.0 dBm -15.0 dBm
Receiver damage level (see Note 2) 0 dBm 0 dBm
TRANSMITTER
GENERAL
Transmitter DFB semi-conductor laser
Pigtail Single-mode
1310 nm 1557 nm
SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS
Central wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm
Central wavelength range 1310 nm 1557 nm
(plus or minus) (plus or minus)
10 nm 3.5 nm
Spectral width 0.65 nm 0.65 nm
Single-mode suppression ratio (SSR) 33.0 dB 33.0 dB
OPTICAL SIGNAL
Maximum tolerated optical reflection 20.0 dB 20.0 dB
Guaranteed maximum launch power
(see Note 3) ? dBm ? dBm
Guaranteed maximum launch power
(see Note 3) -0.5 dBm -0.5 dBm
NOTE 1: The overload level level is the maximum optical power for which a bit-
error rate 10(-10) and all filter tolerance specifications are met.
NOTE 2: Damage level is the maximum optical power for which no damage to
components is occurred.
NOTE 3: These are worst-case parameters and included connector losses, aging,
equipment impairment due to implementation and temperature degradation. This
represents the power level measured at the station fibre on the link side of
connectors.
NOTE 4: Including aging, temperature-connector losses and optical path
penalties. Excludes customer link margin as that depends upon the customer's
maintenance budgets (number of splices expected during service life).
NOTE 5: SC connections are recommended for TN-64X applications.
Page 7 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA. 1.2(4)-1.2.(7)
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS
2.1 HUBBED RING
The Hubbed Ring configuration is optimized for hubbed traffic flows, such as in
access networks and many interoffice networks. The configuration consists of a
ring of remote shelves and the hub. Each remote shelf supports up to 4 protected
or 8 unprotected optical channel interfaces that are connected to corresponding
interfaces at the hub site. More than one remote shelf can be installed at a
given site in order to provide more than 4 (or 8) channel interface drops at
that site. Up to 8 remote shelves are supported for a maximum total of 32
protected or 64 unprotected optical channel interfaces.
FIGURE 7. HUBBED RING CONFIGURATION
[OBJECT OMITTED]
2.2 DISTRIBUTED ATM
A key objective in the development of the equipment has been to provide
value-added transport for ATM switch trunks within a metropolitan network
environment.
The Hubbed Ring is optimized for backhauling trunks from ATM edge switches to an
ATM core or tandem switch because this application involves a hubbed traffic
pattern. The trunks in these applications are currently OC-3, but are quickly
evolving to OC-12. OPTera will handle the upgrade with no additional investment
in the transport infrastructure because the OCI circuit cards are bit-rate
independent. Cambrian believes the economics and scalability of OPTera offers
the network provider the option to provide ATM trunking at the photonic layer
rather than through SONET.
Page 8 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FIGURE 8. DISTRIBUTED ATM CONFIGURATION
[OBJECT OMITTED]
In this application, all the elements will be managed by the Newbridge 46020,
providing simplified overall management.
2.3 POINT-TO-POINT
The point-to-point system can be configured as either protected or unprotected.
In the protected configuration, all optical channels can be bridged onto both a
working fiber and a protection fiber such that in the event of a failure of the
working fiber, the channels can be restored via the protection fiber. Both
protected and unprotected connections can be established over this
configuration, with the protection being optional on a per connection basis. For
example, two unprotected connections can be established over a single
wavelength, one on the working fiber pair, and one on the protection fiber pair,
in place of one protected connection.
For point-to-point applications where the protection capabilities are not
required, an unprotected point-to-point configuration is supported that allows
up to 4 unprotected interfaces to be supported per shelf.
Page 9 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FIGURE 9. POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION - PROTECTED
[OBJECT OMITTED]
FIGURE 10. POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION - UNPROTECTED
[OBJECT OMITTED]
2.4
Page 10 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.5 CONNECTION TYPES
The equipment is designed to complement SONET networks by providing increased
capacity per fiber while leaving protection functions to the SONET network
elements. These applications may use the Unprotected Connections illustrated in
Figure 11 and Figure 13. However, the equipment is also designed to be deployed
in place of a SONET transport layer where appropriate. In order to be capable of
both these options, the equipment incorporates optical layer protection
switching functionality as illustrated in Figure 12. These different connections
options can be provisioned on the same system on a per connection basis.
Figure 11 illustrates a basic unprotected ring connection with an unprotected
client interface. Such a connection may be used when the client signal does not
require any protection, or it is protected via some other network. Note that the
same wavelength on the unused arc of the ring is available for another
connection.
FIGURE 11. UNPROTECTED CONNECTION WITH UNPROTECTED CLIENT INTERFACE
[OBJECT OMITTED]
Figure 12 illustrates a protected connection with an unprotected client
interface. This connection offers survivability against fiber cuts and node
failures, however, the client interface remains unprotected, perhaps because it
is an intra-office connection that is not expected to fail. This mechanism uses
a permanent head-end bridge performed by the OCMs in the two terminating nodes.
The drop node monitors the integrity of both received optical channels and uses
this information to select the better channel.
FIGURE 12. PROTECTED CONNECTION WITH UNPROTECTED CLIENT INTERFACE
[OBJECT OMITTED]
Figure 13 illustrates a high survivability connection where the protection
switching is provided by the subtending equipment, such as a SONET terminal.
Fiber cuts, node failures and channel interface failures are all survived.
Because the optical channel connections are completely transparent, the
subtending equipment protection mechanism operates as if it is directly
connected. In order for this method to work, the optical channel connection must
be transparent to failures. For example, if an OCI detects an incoming LOS from
the subtending equipment, the condition will be alarmed and a LOS will also be
generated at the other end of the connection to the subtending equipment so that
the failure will be detected and the protection switch performed.
Page 11 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FIGURE 13. UNPROTECTED CONNECTIONS WITH EXTERNALLY PROTECTED CLIENT INTERFACE
[OBJECT OMITTED]
2.5 OPTICAL LINK BUDGETS (SYSTEMS WITHOUT OPTICAL AMPLIFIERS)
The following link budgets apply across the entire operating range of 0-50
degrees centigrade and regardless of fiber type (NDSF, DSF, NS-DSF). A 1.5dB
penalty is included to cover all sources of distortion, including chromatic
dispersion on NDSF, and four-wave mixing on DSF and NZ-DSF. No allocation has
been made for connector losses at a Fiber Distribution Frame nor is there any
unallocated margin.
In the OPTera Hubbed Ring configuration, add/drop/passthrough functionality is
provided optically, such that the optical power budget must be calculated on a
ring basis; node to node distances are unimportant. In order to ensure that each
optical channel experiences the same passthrough losses, the wavelength bands
are allocated to the remotes as illustrated in Figure 25. With this allocation
of bands, the following link budgets apply regardless of which remote is
terminating the channel.
FIGURE 14. BAND ALLOCATION IN HUBBED RING CONFIGURATION
[OBJECT OMITTED]
Page 12 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 5. LINK BUDGET FOR HUBBED RING CONFIGURATIONS (UP TO 1.25GB/S)
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
NUMBER OF REMOTE OPTER SHELVES MAXIMUM LOSS FOR RING CIRCUMFERENCE
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
1 21.7 dB
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
2 19.9 dB
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
3 18.3 dB
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
4 16.8 dB
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
5 15.2 dB
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
6 13.7 dB
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
7 12.1 dB
--------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
8 10.6 dB
--------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
OPTera can be configured for point-to-point applications. These applications
involve slightly different configurations of the OMX modules that take advantage
of the topology to increase the system reach. The optical path loss shown in the
tables does not have any allowance for connector loss at Fiber Distribution
Frames nor any unallocated margin.
FIGURE 15. BAND ALLOCATION IN POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION
[OBJECT OMITTED]
Page 13 of ▇▇
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ - ▇▇-▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇ - COMMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 6. LINK BUDGET FOR POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATIONS (UP TO 1.25 GB/S)
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
NUMBER OF REMOTE OPTERA SHELVES MAXIMUM LOSS
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
1 21.7 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
2 20.6 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
3 19.6 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
4 18.7 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
5 17.8 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
6 16.9 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
7 15.9 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
8 15.0 dB
------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------
Page 14 of 14
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTICAL LINE AMPLIFIER
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-RFX-0004
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description Optical Line Amplifier-10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 ABBREVIATIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INTRODUCTION This section lists abbreviation used throughout the entire
document.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUI Attachment Unit Interface
BBE Background Block Error
EBER Excessive Bit Error Rate
EMS Element Management System
ES Errored Second
ES-IS End System - Intermediate System routing
IP Internet Protocol
IS-IS Intermediate System routing
ITU-T International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications Sector
LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOS Loss Of Signal
MAU Media Attachment Unit
MDI Miscellaneous Discrete Input
MDO Miscellaneous Discrete Output
MIB Management Information Base
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OSC Optical Service Channel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSS Operation Support System
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
RS Regenerator Section
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SES Severely Errored Second
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SQL Structured Query Language
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
UAS Unavailable Second
UDP User Datagram Protocol
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 REQUESTED FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 TRANSMISSION FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier provides a link/hop planning NC
tool allowing to simulate and design the
DWDM network (Attenuation, Dispersion,..).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The supplier provides a released document C - This can
containing system planning and engineering be made
rules based on standard single mode fibres. available if
required
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRANSMISSION INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Connector Type E2000 APC FC/SC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Maximum output power of the interfaces 50W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. OLA link/hop limits (attenuation, 5 hops, total IR IR
dispersion,..) as function of number and combined
lengths of hops between terminals. distance of
380km with
maximum
overall Db
loss of 95Db
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Automatic output power adjustment depending C
on the number of received channels
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.1 SYSTEM CAPACITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 100 GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Max. number of optical channels 16 channels IR IR
providing
32(lambda)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Min. number of optical channels 4 channels IR IR
providing
8(lambda)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 50 GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Max. number of optical channels Nortel's IR IR
Optical
equipment
follows the
ITU-T
recommended
200Ghz grid
with 100Ghz
spacing as
defined in
G.692
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Min. number of optical channels See response IR IR
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2 SYSTEM UPGRADE TOWARDS OPTICAL ADD/DROP MUX
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. System Upgrade towards Add/Drop Muliplexer Nortel's
possible Optical Line
Amplifier can
be easily
upgraded to
an OADM
system by the
addition of
the Optical
Add Drop
Module
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2.1 OPTICAL ADD/DROP, IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL
SPACING 100 GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Max. number of optical channels aggregate 8 channels IR IR
east to agg. west supporting 16
wavelengths
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Min. number of optical channels aggregate 2 supporting IR IR
west to agg. east 4 wavelengths
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Max. number of optical channels added/dropped 2 channels IR IR
to/from direction east (2(lambda)
added,
2(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Min. number of optical channels added/dropped 1 channel IR IR
to/from direction east (1(lambda)
added,
1(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Max. number of optical channels added/dropped 2 channels IR IR
to/from direction west (2(lambda)
added,
2(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Min. number of optical channels added/dropped 1 channel IR IR
to/from direction west (1(lambda)
added,
1(lambda)
dropped)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2.2 OPTICAL ADD/DROP, IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL
SPACING 50 GHZ:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Max. number of optical channels aggregate Nortel's IR IR
east to agg. west Optical
equipment
follows the
ITU-T
recommended
200Ghz grid
with 100Ghz
spacing as
defined in
G.692
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Min. number of optical channels aggregate See response IR IR
west to agg. east to 1.2.2.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Max. number of optical channels added/dropped See response IR IR
to/from direction east to 1.2.2.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Min. number of optical channels added/dropped See response IR IR
to/from direction east to 1.2.2.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Max. number of optical channels added/dropped See response IR IR
to/from direction west to 1.2.2.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Min. number of optical channels added/dropped See response IR IR
to/from direction west to 1.2.2.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2.3 OPTICAL ADD/DROP, TRANSPONDERS AND TRIBUTARY
INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Optical interface I-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Optical interface S-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Optical interface L-16.1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Optical interface L-16.2 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Bitrate independent interface NC, however
it is
possible to
multiplex any
bitrate
signal
presented to
the optical
layer using
Nortel's ADM
equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Optical Power Budget without transponders 1 span = 27 Db IR IR
2 spans = 25 Db
3 spans = 23 Db
4 spans = 21 Db
5 spans = 19 Db
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Active wavelength control (not only via chip C
temperature)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Transmit transponders optional for NC - Nortel's
tributary channels (option to use SDH ADMs feed
output signals from coloured their signal to
transmitters without need to implement the MOR+ via the
transponders) couplers
without need
for transponders
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Receive transponders optional for add/drop NC - see above
channels (option to apply DEMUX output
signal to SDH-receiver)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 STM-64 COMPATIBILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. It is possible to upgrade channels from Equipment
STM-16 to STM-64 without need to change will
hardware. initially be
provisioned
to support
STM-64
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.4 OTHER TRANSMISSION FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Dispersion compensation C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Automatic gain control C
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A channel upgrade is not traffic affecting to C
all channels already in service
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 FUNCTIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Selective Call C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Conference Call (up to four participants) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. F- Interface (RS 232) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Qecc Routing (2 level IS-IS) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Q I/F (Ethernet) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Optical Supervisory Channel C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. OSC Integrated IR IR
o wavelength OSC at 1510nm
o bitrate or separate
o optical span limit module
o transmission protocol operating at
1625nm
operating at
10Gbit/s with
a limit of 5
spans
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 O & M INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 8 x Remote Control Inputs NC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Remote Control Outputs C - However
Management
Performance
may be reduced
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Card LED support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Subrack LED support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Rack Alarm support C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Laser Restart for Test C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Laser Shutdown C - alarms
are raised if
for whatever
reason a loss
of signal
occurs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical See response
interface to 5.2.1.9
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any C
optical interface
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C - Loss of
Signal is
reported
through the
use of alarms
based upon
input and
output signal
thresholds.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Detection of number of received channels C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Monitoring of laser current for pump laser 1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Monitoring of laser current for pump laser 2 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Monitoring of temperature for pump laser 1 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Monitoring of temperature for pump laser 2 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Monitoring of laser temperature C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Monitoring of transmitted wavelength C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Monitoring of received input power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Monitoring of transmitted output power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Detection of coupler temperature high C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Detection of grating temperature high C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of OOF Regen section
is monitored
by the SDH
ADM equipment
at regen site
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of LOF See response
to 4.1.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 See response
BIP-8 parity calculation on demux unit to 4.1.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 See response
BIP-8 parity calculation on transponder unit to 4.1.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of Section Trace Mismatch based on See response
J0 Byte monitoring on demux unit to 4.1.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of Section Trace Mismatch based on Transponder
J0 Byte monitoring on transponder unit Unit not used
in this
solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of Remote Control Input Active C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of OSC Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.4 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Detection of Secondary Power Fail See response
to 6.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Detection of Primary Power Low See response
to 6.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Detection of Primary Power Fail per each See response
single power feed to 6.3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity C
Check Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Detection of System Software Integrity Check C
Failure
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Detection of Card Out C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of C
internal parity mismatch etc.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Detection of Wrong Card C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Card Protection Switch Active C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity C
Exceeded
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Software Download in Progress C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Software Download Failure C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Software Download Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Card Restoration Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. Electronic Label Update C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of C - It is
toggling alarms) possible to
filter alarms
using the
functionality
of INM,
Nortel's
Network
Management
System
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, C
suppression of consequent alarms)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Alarm Inversion Facility C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Performance of the alarm throughput
greater than 10 alarms per second
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding
Suppression per functional unit (e.g.
Regenerator Section ...)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Upload of Configuration Data - on single C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk C
command
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set of transmitted output power C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Set of input power warning thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Set input power switch off thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Set output power warning thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Set output power switch off thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Set laser current alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Set of laser temperature alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Set of transmitted wavelength alarm thresholds C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown NC - The
according to ITU-T G.958 OPTera LH OLA
is a Class 3A
system. Whilst not
advised, a Class 3A
system is deemed to
be safe for long
term viewing
without optical
aids and with the
supplied warning
labels and
procedural
precautions, ALS is
not necessary for
this equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Enable / Disable Laser C - it is
possible to
enable/disable
the laser
both manually
and remotely
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Set Threshold B1-EBER See response
to 4.1.2.1
above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Event buffer C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Heart Beat Function for all processes NC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Automatic Re-boot after power failure C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Real time clock function C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Automatic synchronization of NE real time C
clock on EMS real time clock
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. It is possible to set the NE time and date C
via EMS/LCT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. NSAP Address modification C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Local Software Download C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Remote Software Download C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Upload of configuration data to EMS/LCT C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Download of configuration data from EMS/LCT C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Manager Decision Process for equipment access C
control
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 LOGS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Alarm / Status Log C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Performance Log (storage capacity at least C
8 x 15 min intervals and 30 x 24 h interval
for each monitoring point)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Configuration Log (storage capacity at least C
24 h)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Access Control Log (storage capacity at C
least 10 days)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 REDUNDANCY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Dual Power Feed C - standard
2 power
feeds,
optional 6
power feeds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 1+1 Protection of Power Supply The OPTera
OLA system is
powered by
redundant
feeds.
Failure of
one of the
power feeds
due to an
open or short
circuit does
not affect
the system.
Two
breaker/filter
modules
provide power
for the
OPtera OLA
shelves.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Redundancy of pump lasers
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C - managed
via the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Integrity Check of System Software See response
to 6.4.1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Configuration of Loop Back on all optical NC
Interface Cards
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Optical monitoring port on each transmit Transponder
transponder (output signal) Unit not used
in this
solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Optical monitoring port on each receive Transponder
transponder (input signal) Unit not used
in this
solution
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Optical monitoring port on each pre- C - managed
amplifier (input signal) via the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Optical monitoring port on each C - managed
booster-amplifier (output signal) via the
functionality
of the NE OPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.5 INVENTORY DATA
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Nortel's INM
Interfaces Network
Management system
offers the option
of centralised
inventory
management, which
is accessed via the
GNB and allows the
user to retrieve an
inventory of the
remotely located
NEs. The retrieved
information can be
displayed and saved
to a file suitable
for further
processing
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade See response
to 6.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware See response
Releases to 6.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware See response
Releases to 6.5.1 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Management by
Releases release
automatically
defines a set of
compatible software
loads (called the
software lineup)
for all
downloadable CPs in
a span of control
and enforces strict
software
configuration
management among
these loads.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software See response
Releases to the Management System to 6.5.4 above
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Electronic Label contents: See response
o Unit hardware release / version to 6.5.1
o Unit hardware serial number above
o Unit firmware release / version
o Unit software release / version
o Unit installation date of unit/NE
o Production date of unit/NE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL
COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with Stationary Use Conditions C
acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. No need for air conditioning via elevated C
ground floor
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with EN 55022 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compliance with EN 50082 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.3 SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CE certification available C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Electrical safety according to EN 41003 C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para AVAILABLE NOW AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Comment
12/1999 12/2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. General requirements according to EN 60950 C
A1, A2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Fire and heat safety according to ETS 300 C
019-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x C
300 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x
600 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. System installation and h/w upgrade via front C
access possible
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Number of required Racks in minimum 1 IR IR
configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Number of required Racks in maximum 1 IR IR
configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 POWER SUPPLY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Nominal input voltage -48V C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Minimum accepted input voltage -38V IR IR
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Maximum accepted input voltage -75V IR IR
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 AVAILABILITY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for C - see Annex 1 IR IR
each functional unit of the offered equipment
based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in
Annex 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 POWER CONSUMPTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The supplier shall provide worst case power C - see Annex 1 IR IR
consumption figures for each functional unit
of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 SYSTEM MANUALS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT FIGURE MAXIMUM POWER
CONSUMPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANDATORY CONTROL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shelf Controller NTCA41BA 1125 13W/20W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Half Height Breaker NTCA40CA 256 5W/8W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance Interface NTCA42AA 1139 7.5W/10W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Message Transfer NTCA48AA 677 8W/10W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPTIONAL CONTROL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parallel Telemetry Interface NTCA45AA 703 2W/5W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AMPLIFIER/FILTER OPTIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOR+ Red Pre/ Blue Post with OSC NTCA11PK 4499 35W/50W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOR+ Blue Pre/Red Post with OSC NTCA11NK 4499 35W/50W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OSC NTCA11CA 1024 25W/40W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION ADM-16/4
-----------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0007
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
-----------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature description ADM-16-4-10
-----------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of ADM-16/4 Equipment
The equipment shall mainly be applied for combining
VC-4 add/drop to/from backbone rings.
-----------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
1 REQUESTED FEATURES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 ELECTRICAL TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. STM-1 G.703 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 OPTICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. S-1.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. L-1.1 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. L-1.2 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. S-4.1 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. L-4.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. L-4.2 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. V-4.2 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. S-16.1 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. ▇-▇▇.▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. ▇-▇▇.▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. V-16.2 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. S-16.1 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. L-16.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. L-16.2 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. V-16.2 Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Coloured Interfaces 100 GHz channel spacing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Coloured Interfaces 50 GHz channel spacing Nc Nc Nc 07.12217
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Higher order tributary interface types can be mixed without C C C
affecting the tributary capacity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Up to 16 active STM-1 el. or optical interfaces. C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. Up to 4 active optical STM-4 interfaces. C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. Bi-directional Connections C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 C C C
(VC-4-4c)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 Nc Nc Nc
(VC-4-16c)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. High order add/drop capacity of 16 * VC-4 equivalents from C C C
aggregate east
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. High order add/drop capacity of 16 * VC-4 equivalents from C C C
aggregate west
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. High order add/drop capacity of 16 * VC-4 equivalents from C C C
aggregate east and west
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. High Order aggregate to aggregate connectivity of 16 STM-1 C C C
equivalents (east and west)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. STM-N timing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30. 2048 kHz timing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
33. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) Nc Nc Nc 07.31335
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. Autonomous Timing Source Selection acc. to highest quality and C C C
highest priority
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. Manual Timing Source Selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. One 2048 kHz timing output port C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
39. Configurable timing output squelch function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40. STM-N C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
41. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. Priority List (at least 7 entries) Nc Nc Nc 07.31335
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. Autonomous timing source selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. Manual Timing Source selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 OVERHEAD ACCESS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 OVERHEAD BYTES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. Access to F1 as transparent channel C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. Access to E1 as transparent channel C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. Access to F2 as transparent channel Nc Nc Nc 07.4147
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 OVERHEAD ACCESS INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. 64 K on V.11 (towards either MSOH or RSOH of aggregate interface) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. 64 K on V.11 (towards POH of tributary interface) Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3 OVERHEAD CHANNEL CROSS CONNECTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. 64 K between synchronous ports and towards external interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1 INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. 1 * 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
52. 2 * 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. Selective Call C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. Conference Call (up to four participants) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
55. F- Interface (RS 232) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. Qecc via any ECCR on optical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. Qecc via any ECCM on optical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. Qecc via any ECCR on electrical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Qecc via any ECCM on electrical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
61. Domain Partitioning Repair function Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address prefix) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte of SDH Nc Nc Nc
tributary interface
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via other
operator's SDH network)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 O & M INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. Remote Control Outputs C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. Card LED support C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. Subrack LED support C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. Rack Alarm support C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. at any VC-4 TTP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. at any MST C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. at any RST C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. at any AU-4 CTP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 07.775
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. Threshold Crossing Notification C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface Nc Nc Nc 07.880
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. Detection of OOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. Detection of LOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity calculation C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. Detection of MS-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. Detection of Signal Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity C C C
error calculation
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Detection of FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity calculations C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Detection of AU-LOP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Detection of AU-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid Nc Nc Nc 07.81100
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ Nc Nc Nc 07.81100
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.6 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid Nc Nc Nc 07.81100
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ Nc Nc Nc 07.81100
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ Nc Nc Nc 07.81100
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.7 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of Trib.-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Detection of Trib.-LOS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of Trib.-LOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS, Trib.-LOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.8 SETS AND SETPI
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
119. Detection of SETG - Hold C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Detection of SETG - Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of Sync. Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C C C 07.81123
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of Sync. LOS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.9 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of Remote Control Input Active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.10 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Detection of Secondary Power Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
??? 130. C C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Detection of Card Out C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch etc.) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Detection of Wrong Card C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Network Protection Switch Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 STATUS EVENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141. System Software Integrity Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Laser Restart for Test Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Synchronisation Source Quality Change C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. External Synchronisation Output Squelched C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Section Layer Protection Switch Active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Network Protection Switch Event C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Card Protection Switch Active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded Nc Nc Nc 07.82150
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded Nc Nc Nc 07.82150
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
152. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded Nc Nc Nc 07.82150
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Access Log Capacity Exceeded Nc Nc Nc 07.82150
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
154. Software Download in Progress C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Software Download Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
157. Software Download Complete C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Card Restoration Complete C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
??? 160. Electronic Label Update NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
162. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent C C C
alarms)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Alarm Inversion Facility C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Performance of the alarm throughput GREATER THAN 10 alarms per second C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm per port C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm group per card C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm group per NE C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
??? 168. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per functional C C C
unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown NA NA NA 07.880
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Enable / Disable Laser NA NA NA 07.9173
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) NA NA NA 07.9173
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Set Threshold B2-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Set Threshold B1-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ Nc Nc Nc 07.92179
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of
HP-▇▇▇ (per Path) Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of
HP-SLM (per Path) Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) Nc Nc Nc 07.92183
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
186. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 NETWORK PROTECTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 HIGHER ORDER LINEAR VC TRAIL PROTECTION (SINGLE ENDED)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Detection Criterion Signal Degrade (B3 Bit Error Rate) NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN 300ms NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. Configurable Hold-Off Time NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. Manual Switching via Management Interface NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN 100ms NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Configurable Hold-Off Time NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Manual Switching via Management Interface NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 1+1 LINE PROTECTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. MSP function on all aggregates Nc Nc Nc 07.201
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. MSP function on all optical tributaries C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. MSP function on all electrical STM-1 tributaries Nc Nc Nc 07.203
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according C C C
to Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN 50ms C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NA NA NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.4 MS SHARED RING PROTECTION (MSBSHR)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according C C C
to Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN 50ms C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. Revertive Switching C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Maximum number of network elements in the ring C C C 07.214
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. It is possible to configure (unprotected) low priority traffic C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.1 GENERAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Event buffer C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Heart Beat Function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Re-boot function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. Real time clock function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. NSAP Address modification C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Local Software Download C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Remote Software Download C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPT Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.2 LOGS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Alarm / Status Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Performance Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Configuration Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Access Control Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.3 REDUNDANCY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection STM-1 G.703 Nc Nc Nc 07.11233
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. 1+1 Protection of all Central Traffic Carrying Cards C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. 1+1 Protection of Clock System C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Duration LESS THAN 5s for card protection automatic switch over C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. Integrity Check of System Software C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. Configuration of Loop Back on all PDH Interface Cards C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH Interface Cards C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface Cards Nc Nc Nc 07.11241
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
??? 242. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block Nc Nc Nc 07.11241
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Test Interface on all electrical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Optical Line Testing Nc Nc Nc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.5 INVENTORY DATA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
??? 245. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the C C C
Management System
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL
COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 Nc Nc Nc 07.12251
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.2 253. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Compliance with EN 50082 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256. Compliance with EN 60950 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
257. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. System installation and h/w upgrade via front access possible C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER SUPPLY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Nominal input voltage -48V C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Minimum accepted input voltage -40 V -40 V -40 V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Maximum accepted input voltage -60 V -60 V -60 V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 AVAILABILITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional unit of IR IR IR ANNEX 1
the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 POWER CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption figures for IR IR IR ANNEX 1
each functional unit of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 SYSTEM MANUALS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
2 REFERENCES
2.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables Type
LSH-HRL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy /SDH) equipment functional
blocks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on
synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International constant
Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Me(beta)verfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereiche sowie Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 2: Industriebereich
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-16X
ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT MAXIMUM POWER
FIGURE CONSUMPTION / W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT7E19AA External synchronisation 1823 11.2 (Note: Dissipation
interface carrier figure is for 2 ESI units
plus the carrier)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW27AA External Synchronisation 2220
Interface (2 MHz)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW27AA External Synchronisation 2220
Interface (2 MHz)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT7E20GC SH PROCESSOR FOR SDH (DCC 6397 25
HUBBING)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT7E23AA Maintenance Interface ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ OPC with tape drive 59964 70
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT8E02DD OC-48/STM16 LR SAW Rx Interface 11458 30
(SC)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT8E02DD OC-48/STM16 LR SAW Rx Interface 11458 30
(SC)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT8E06AB OC-48/STM-16 Ring Demux 5395 54
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NT8E06AB OC-48/STM-16 Ring Demux 5395 54
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW01AD STM16 LR 1557 Ring Tx (SC) 7907 45
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW01AD STM16 LR 1557 Ring Tx (SC) 7907 45
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW08CA STM1e/140 Mbit/s tributary 4653 16
mapper
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW08CA STM1e/140 Mbit/s tributary 4653 16
mapper
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW11CD STM1o IR 1310 Tributary I/F (SC) 4568 6.5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW14AA STM1e/140 Mbits/s I/O i/f 614 4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW14BA 34 Mbit/s I/O i/f 153 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW19BA STM1 Optical Carrier Assembly 1823 8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW21AB 34 M Mapper (Slot 16 compatable 4520 20
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW21AB 34 M Mapper (Slot 16 compatable 4520 20
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTFW50EA STM16 LTE/ADM/RING SHELF 5337 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
================================================================================
UNIT UNIT ID UNIT FIT FIGURE MAXIMUM POWER
NAME/ CONSUMPTION
TYPE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
================================================================================
end of document
ANNEX 2: ANSWERS ON TN-64 X QUESTIONS FOR CCG HANNOVER
1. CIRCUIT PACK POWER DISSIPATION
System Specifications 1-7
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-9
CIRCUIT PACK POWER DISSIPATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CIRCUIT PACK TYPICAL POWER MAXIMUM POWER
DISSIPATION DISSIPATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-64 transmit interface ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇▇ DWDM transmit interface ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇▇ regen transmit interface 60 W 70 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-64 DWDM regen transmit interface 60 W 70 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-64 long reach receive interface 34 W 72 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-64 short reach receive interface ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇▇ demultiplexer ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇▇ data overhead switch ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-16 transmit/receive interface ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ transmit/receive interface ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPC storage 12.5 W 17 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPC controller ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPC interface 2.5 W 6 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPC removable media 0.5 W 2 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shelf controller ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance interface 7.5 W 10 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Message exchange 8 W 10 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parallel telemetry 2 W 5 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
External synchronization interface ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Breaker/filter module 5 W 8 W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fan module ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Multiwavelength optical repeater ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nortel TN-64X Technical Specifications
2. FITS (MTBF) TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FITS TN-64X
DESCRIPTION FITS MTBF
YEARS
TN-64X (RELEASE 1)
STM-64 Tx (DWDM) 13790 8.28
STM-64 Rx 14596 7.82
STM-64 Demux 7891 14.47
STM-64 Regen Tx (DWDM) 12333 9.26
4FR Switcher (DOS) 11426 9.99
STM-16 1310nm/1557nm Tx/Rx Tributary Card 13255 8.61
MOR without OSC 18417 6.20
MOR with 1510nm OSC 23844 4.79
OSC (1620nm) 5427 21.03
DWDM Coupler/mux - 8 wavelengths 5734 19.91
DWDM Coupler/mux - 16 wavelength upgrade 5098 22.39
DWDM - PBA Mux/Demux 4515 25.28
DWDM - PBA Dual Red/Blue Splitter 2650 43.08
1550/1625 WDM Coupler 5427 21.03
DWDM OADM Coupler - 2 wavelengths 3604 31.67
TN-64X (RELEASE 1 OVERLAY)
MOR Plus with 1510nm OSC 23844 4.79
TN-64X (FUTURE RELEASE)
MOR Plus without OSC 18417 6.20
Orderwire 4171 27.37
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: No. of Tribcards per
Nortel Dasa interface type
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - 39 Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
60528 Frankfurt / Main
Chapter:
Item No.:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Release Trib Type No per Card No available No available
protected unprotected
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R2 current STM16o 1 4W, 4P 4W
STM 4o 4 16W, 16P 16W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R3 e/o Q2 2000 STM16o 1 4W, 4P 8W
STM 4o 4 16W. 16P 32W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R4 e/o 2000 As Release 3 +
STM 1o 4 (16?) 16W, 16P 32W
STM1e 4 16W, 16P 32W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 6.1
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 6
Item No.: 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Q ecc routing
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In the current Release (R2) it is set to 0000.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
================================================================================
Supplier: Reference No.: 7.1
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 1
Item No.: 1
================================================================================
With Regard to TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Electrical Tributary Interface STM-1 G.703
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Proposed availability date is 2(nd) quarter 2000.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
================================================================================
Supplier: Reference No.: 7.1
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 6
Item No.: 59
================================================================================
With Regard to TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F-Interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local maintenance is possible with a VT100 Terminal.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
================================================================================
Supplier: Reference No.: 7.1
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 7
Item No.: 78
================================================================================
With Regard to TN-64X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Performance Management at any AU-4 CTP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Performance monitoring on transiting AU4s can be done by using Intermediate Path
Performance Monitoring (IPPM), which is implemented on current releases.
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION ADM-16/1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-RFX-00011
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description ADM-16-1-10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of the ADM-16/1 Equipment.
The equipment shall mainly be applied for cost efficient combination of VC-4 add/drop
to/from backbone rings with low order trail termination..
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 REQUESTED FEATURES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 Mbit/s G.703 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 Mbit/s G.704 frame monitoring option on incoming traffic C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 2 Mbit/s, retiming 250 us buffer
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. 34 Mbit/s G.703 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. 45 Mbit/s G.703 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. ▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇. ▇-▇.▇ ▇ ▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. S-4.1 NC NC C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. S-16.11 NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. S-1.1 NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. S-4.1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. S-16.1(1) NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. L-16.1 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. L-16.2 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. V-16.2 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Coloured Interfaces 100 GHz channel spacing NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Coloured Interfaces 50 GHz channel spacing NC NC NC 11.1216
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 2 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 252 252 252
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 34 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 24 24 24
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 45 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 24 24 24
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. Up to (t.b.d.) el. 155 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 8 8 8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. up to (t.b.d.) aggregates of type STM-1 el. NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. up to (t.b.d.) aggregates of type STM-4 2 2 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. Bi-directional Connections on VC-12 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. Bi-directional Connections on VC-3 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. Bi-directional Connections on VC-4 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 NC C C
(VC-4-4c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 NC C C
(VC-4-16c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.1 HIGHER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------
(1) interface shall be applied for contiguous concatenation AU-4-16c
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. HO add/drop of 16 * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate east NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30. HO add/drop of 16 * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate west NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. HO add/drop of 32 * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate east and west NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. HO aggregate to aggregate connectivity of 16 STM-1 equivalents NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2 LOWER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
33. VC-12 and VC-3 cross connect function for up to 16 VC-equivalents NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34. VC-12 and VC-3 cross connect function for up to 32 VC-4 equivalents NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. STM-N timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. 2048 kHz timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
39. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
41. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) NC NC NC 11.341
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. Autonomous Timing Source Selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. Manual Timing Source Selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. One 2048 kHz timing output port C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. Configurable timing output squelch function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. STM-N timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support)c C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. Priority List (at least 7 entries) NC NC NC 11.341
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. Autonomous timing source selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. Manual Timing Source selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 OVERHEAD ACCESS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 OVERHEAD BYTES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. Access to F1 as transparent channel C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
52. Access to E1 as transparent channel C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. Access to F2 as transparent channel NC NC NC 11.453
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 OVERHEAD ACCESS INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. 64 K on V.11 (towards either MSOH or RSOH of aggregate interface) NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
55. 64 K on V.11 (towards POH of tributary interface) NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3 OVERHEAD CHANNEL CROSS CONNECTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. 64 K between synchronous ports and towards external interface NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1 INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. 1 * 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. 2 * 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 FUNCTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. Selective Call C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Conference Call (up to four participants) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
61.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. F- Interface (RS 232) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. Q I/F (Ethernet) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. Qecc via any ECC(R) on optical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. Qecc via any ECC(M) on optical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. Qecc via any ECC(R) on electrical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. Qecc via any ECC(M) on electrical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. Domain Partitioning Repair function
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address prefix) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte C C C
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via other
operator's SDH network)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 O & M INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. Remote Control Outputs NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. Card LED support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. Subrack LED support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. Rack Alarm support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. at any MST C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. at any RST C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. at any VC-4 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. at any VC-3 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. at any VC-12 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. at any AU-4 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. at any VC-3 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. at any VC-12 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection NC NC NC 11.788
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. for any TU-3 Tandem Connection NC NC NC 11.788
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. for any TU-12 Tandem Connection NC NC NC 11.788
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Threshold Crossing Notification C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of OOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity calculation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of Signal Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity error
calculation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity calculations C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Detection of AU-LOP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Detection of AU-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
119. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.6 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.7 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.8 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.9 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.10 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
152. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
154. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
157. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.11 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Detection of Trib.-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
160. Detection of Trib.-LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Detection of Trib.-LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
162. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS, Trib.-LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.12 SETS AND SETPI
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Detection of SETG - Hold C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. Detection of SETG - Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. Detection of Sync. Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
168. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. Detection of Sync. LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.13 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Detection of Remote Control Input Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.14 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. Detection of Secondary Power Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Detection of Primary Power Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Detection of Card Out C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch etc.) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Detection of Wrong Card C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Network Protection Switch Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 STATUS EVENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
186. System Software Integrity Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Laser Restart for Test C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Synchronisation Source Quality Change C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. External Synchronisation Output Squelched C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Section Layer Protection Switch Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. Network Protection Switch Event C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. Card Protection Switch Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Software Download in Progress C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Software Download Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. Software Download Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. Card Restoration Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. Electronic Label Update C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent C C C
alarms)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Alarm Inversion Facility C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Performance of the alarm throughput > 10 alarms per second C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm C C C per port
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm C C C group per card
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm C C C group per NE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per functional C C C
unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Enable / Disable Laser C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Set Threshold B2-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Set Threshold B1-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.5 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.6 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.7 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
242. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.8 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
245. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.9 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 NETWORK PROTECTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
253. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 100ms C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
257. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
268. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
269. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
270. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.5 1+1 LINE PROTECTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
271. 1+1 Line Protection function on all aggregates NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
272. 1+1 Line Protection function on all optical tributaries NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
273. 1+1 Line Protection function on all electrical STM-1 tributaries NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
274. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according
to Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
275. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 50ms NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
276. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
277. Manual Switching via Management Interface NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
278. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.6 MS SHARED RING PROTECTION (MSBSHR)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
279. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according to NC NC NC
Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
280. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 50ms NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
281. Manual Switching via Management Interface NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
282. Revertive Switching NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
283. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
284. Maximum number of network elements in the ring NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
285. It is possible to configure (unprotected) low priority traffic NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
286. Event buffer C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
287. Heart Beat Function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
288. Re-boot function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
289. Real time clock function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290. NSAP Address modification C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
291. Local Software Download C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
292. Remote Software Download C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
293. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
294. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
295. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
296. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
297. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
298. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
299. Display of VC-3 Signal ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. Display of VC-3 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
301. Display of VC-3 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
302. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
303. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPT C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
304. Display of VC-12 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
305. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
306. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.2 LOGS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
307. Alarm / Status Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
308. Performance Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
309. Configuration Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
310. Access Control Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.3 REDUNDANCY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
311. 1:N Tributary Card Protection 2 Mbit/s NC NC C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
312. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 34 Mbit/s NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
313. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 45 Mbit/s NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
314. 1:M or 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection STM-1 G.703 NC C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
315. 1+1 Protection of all Central Traffic Carrying Cards C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
316. 1+1 Protection of Clock System C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
317. Duration less than 5s for card protection automatic switch over C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
318. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
319. Integrity Check of System Software C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
320. Configuration of Loop Back on port level on all PDH Interface Cards C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
321. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on STM-1 el. i/f C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
322. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on all STM-4 opt. interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
323. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
324. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
325. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
326. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
327. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
328. Configuration of Loop Back on the LPC functional block C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
329. Test Access Interface on all electrical interfaces NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
330. Test Access Interface on all optical interfaces NC NC NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
331. Optical Line Testing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.5 INVENTORY DATA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
332. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
333. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
334. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
335. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
336. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
337. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the C C C
Management System
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
338. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 NC NC NC 11.12338
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
339. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
340. Compliance with EN 50082 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
341. Compliance with EN 60950 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
342. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
343. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
344. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 600 mm C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
345. System installation and h/w upgrade via front access possible C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER SUPPLY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
346. Nominal input voltage -48V C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
347. Minimum accepted input voltage -38V -38V -38V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
348. Maximum accepted input voltage -75V -75V -75V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 AVAILABILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
349. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional unit of IR IR IR ANNEX 1
the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 POWER CONSUMPTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
350. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption figures for IR IR IR ANNEX 1
each functional unit of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 SYSTEM MANUALS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
351. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
352. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE/TN-16XE
2 REFERENCES
2.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables Type
LSH-HRL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy/SDH) equipment functional
blocks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on
synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International
constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Messverfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm
Storfestigkeit - Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und
Gewerbebereiche sowie Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm
Storfestigkeit - Teil 2: Industriebereich
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE/TN-16XE
ANNEX1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
The following tables list details of the power dissipation, weight, FITS and
size for the TN-4XE equipment.
TABLE 8-1
SUBRACK KEY SPECIFICATION DETAILS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (MM)
(SEE CHAPTER 4) CONSUMPTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TN-4XE Mux Maximum 18 kg (max.) 41 Height:
assembly (full fit):253 W (unequipped) 550 mm (Including fibretray)
NTEU70AA 20 kg (actual) 459 mm (excluding fibre tray}
An additional height of 50 mm if
Typical:220 W 2 Mbit/s tributary cabling is
installed.
Width:
450 mm (excl. mounting flanges)
Depth:
280 mm (incl. doors/covers)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fan Tray ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ TBD Height:
NTEUSSAA 75 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-2
AGGREGATE UNIT KEY SPECIFICATION DETAILS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER CONSUMPTION WEIGHT FITS WIDTH
(SEE CHAPTER 5) (KG) (MM)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 1310 mm short haul optical Maximum: 40W 1.875 2609 76.2
aggregate
NTEU20AA Typical: 36W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 1550 mm long haul optical Maximum: 40W 1.875 2609 76.2
aggregate
NTEU21AA Typical: 36W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE/TN-16XE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS NOMINAL
(SEE CHAPTER 6) CONSUMPTION (KG) WIDTH
(MM)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 optical dual-port tributary Maximum: 20 W 1.250 2184 25.4
unit (1310 mm, short haul)
NTEU10AA Typical: 17.5 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1a/140 Mibit/s tributary unit Maximum: 20W ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ 25.4
NTEU13AA
Typical: 17.5 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Mbit/s G.703 75 ohm tributary Maximum: 20 W TBD 500 25.4
unit
NTEU11AA Typical: 17.5 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Mbit/s G.703 75 ohm tributary unit Maximum: 20 W TBD 500 25.4
NTEU12AA
Typical: 17.5 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-4
SERVICE INTERFACE MODULE (SIM) KEY DETAILS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS NOMINAL
(SEE CHAPTER 4) CONSUMPTION (KG) WIDTH
(MM)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETHERNET SIM PCB Assembly ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ 28 25.4
NTEU6006
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-5
CONNECTOR PANEL KEY DETAILS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS WIDTH
(SEE CHAPTER 4) CONSUMPTION (KG) (MM)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
End Of Shelf Upper Maximum: 5 W 0.468 345 25.4
NTEU4DAA
Typical: 3 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
End Of Shelf Lower Maximum: 8 W 0.468 439 25.4
NTEU41AA
Typical: 5 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-6
SPECIAL FUNCTION UNITS SPECIFICATION DETAILS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
(SEE CHAPTER 7) CONSUMPTION (MM)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Engineering Orderwire Maximum: 12 W ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ TBD
(EOW) card
NTEU43AA Typical: 8 W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 11.1
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - 39
60528 Frankfurt / Main Chapter: 1
Item No.: 8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-4XE/16XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 Tributary
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gate 2 is February 2000.
Gate 2a is March 2000.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 11.12.16
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
Chapter: 1
Item No.: 16, 17
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coloured Interfaces 100/50 GHz Channel Spacing
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Transmitters and Regenerators provide a high performance tight wavelength
optical signal aligned with the 200 GHz ITU-T grid with a wavelength tolerance
of plus or minus 0.25 nm and provisionable output power.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 11.12338
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
Chapter: 12
Item No.: 338
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stationary Use Conditions acc. To prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATIONAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The TN-4XE can operate in the following operating environments as specified in
ETS 300-019 class 3.1 (Temperature Controlled Locations) subject to the thermal
management limitations specified above.
NON-OPERATIONAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
For storage and transportation, the equipment withstands non-operational
temperatures between -40 and +70 degrees C as specified in ETSI Standard ETS
300-019.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
20 to 55% relative humidity or 3.6 kPa water vapor pressure, whichever is less,
over the normal temperature range; no condensation. Temperature: +4.5 degrees to
+38 degrees C.
SHORT-TERM OPERATION
Testing methodology IEC 68-2-56 Cb +30 degrees C, 95% relative humidity.
NOTE: Short-term is defined to be no more than 72 consecutive hours and a total
of not more than 15 days in one year.
EXCHANGE ENVIRONMENT
Normal operating environment 0 to +40 degrees C Exceptional operating
environment -5 to +45 degrees C.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 11.341
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
Chapter: 3
Item No.: 41, 48
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Timing Source Priority Levels
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Each of the selection circuits has a synchronization source hierarchy list.
These contain up to four synchronization sources listed in order of selection
preference. If the operator wishes to amend the hierarchy list all entries must
be re-entered.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION DXC-N/1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0009
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description DXC-N-1-10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of the Lower Order DXC Equipment.
The equipment shall mainly be applied for grooming lower order VCs from local access
providers or co-located customers towards STM-16 rings.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
1 REQUESTED FEATURES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 Mbit/s G.703 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 Mbit/s G.704 frame monitoring option on incoming traffic C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 2 Mbit/s, retiming 250 us buffer
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. 34 Mbit/s G.703 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. 45 Mbit/s G.703 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. STM-1 G.703 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. S-1.1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. S-4.1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. S-16.1 Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. L-16.1 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. L-16.2 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. V-16.2 Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 2 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 252 252 252
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 34 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 24 24 24
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 45 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 24 24 24
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Up to (t.b.d.) el. 155 Mbit/s ports can be equipped 8 8 8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. up to (t.b.d.) ports of type STM-1 el. can be equipped 8 8 8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. up to (t.b.d.) prots of type STM-4 can be equipped 2 2 4
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Bi-directional Connections on VC-12 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Bi-directional Connections on VC-3 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. Bi-directional Connections on VC-4 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 Nc C C
(VC-4-4c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 Nc C C
(VC-4-16c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.1 HIGHER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. HO connectivity of 16 * VC-4 equivalents Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. HO connectivity of 64 * VC-4 equivalents Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. HO connectivity of 128 * VC-4 equivalents Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2 LOWER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. LO connectivity of 16 * VC-4 equivalents Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. LO connectivity of 64 * VC-4 equivalents Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. LO connectivity of 128 * VC-4 equivalents Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30. STM-N timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. 2048 kHz timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
33. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) Nc Nc Nc 09.336
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. Autonomous Timing Source Selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. Manual Timing Source Selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
39. One 2048 kHz timing output port C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40. Configurable timing output squelch function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
41. STM-N timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. Priority List (at least 7 entries) Nc Nc Nc 09.336
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. Autonomous timing source selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. Manual Timing Source selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 OVERHEAD ACCESS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 OVERHEAD BYTES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. Access to F1 as transparent channel C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. Access to E1 as transparent channel C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. Access to F2 as transparent channel Nc Nc Nc 09.448
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 OVERHEAD ACCESS INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. 64 K on V.11 (towards either MSOH or RSOH of aggregate interface) Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. 64 K on V.11 (towards POH of tributary interface) Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3 OVERHEAD CHANNEL CROSS CONNECTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. 64 K between syNchronous ports and towards external interface Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1 INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
52. 1 * 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. 2 * 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 FUNCTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. Selective Call C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
55. Conference Call (up to four participants) Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. F- Interface (RS 232) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. Q I/F (Ethernet) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. Qecc via any ECC(R) on optical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Qecc via any ECC(M) on optical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
61. Qecc via any ECC(R) on electrical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. Qecc via any ECC(M) on electrical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. Domain Partitioning Repair function
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address prefix) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte of SDH C C C
interface
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via other
operator's SDH network)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 O & M INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. Remote Control Outputs Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. Card LED support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. Subrack LED support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. Rack Alarm support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. at any MST C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. at any RST C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. at any VC-4 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. at any VC-3 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. at any VC-12 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. at any AU-4 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. at any VC-3 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. at any VC-12 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 09.782
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. for any TU-3 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 09.782
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. for any TU-12 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 09.782
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. Threshold Crossing Notification C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Detection of OOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Detection of LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity calculation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of Signal Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity error
calculation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Detection of FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity calculations C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Detection of AU-LOP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of AU-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.6 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
119. Detection of EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.7 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.8 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.9 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.10 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
152. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.11 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Detection of Trib.-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
154. Detection of Trib.-LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Detection of Trib.-LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS, Trib.-LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.12 SETS AND SETPI
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
157. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Detection of SETG - Hold C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
160. Detection of SETG - Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Detection of Sync. Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
162. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Detection of Sync. LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.13 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. Detection of Remote Control Input Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.14 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
168. Detection of Secondary Power Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. Detection of Primary Power Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Detection of Card Out C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch etc.) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Detection of Wrong Card C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Network Protection Switch Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 STATUS EVENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. System Software Integrity Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Laser Restart for Test C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Synchronisation Source Quality Change C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. External Synchronisation Output Squelched C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
186. Section Layer Protection Switch Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Network Protection Switch Event C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Card Protection Switch Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. Software Download in Progress C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. Software Download Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Software Download Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Card Restoration Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Electronic Label Update C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent C C C
alarms)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. Alarm Inversion Facility C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. Performance of the alarm throughput > 10 alarms per second C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm per port C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm group per card C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm group per NE C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per functional C C C
unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. Enable / Disable Laser C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. Set Threshold B2-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Set Threshold B1-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.5 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.6 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.7 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.8 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
242. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.9 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
245. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 NETWORK PROTECTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 100ms C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
253. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
257. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.5 1+1 LINE PROTECTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. 1+1 Line Protection function on all optical tributaries Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. 1+1 Line Protection function on all electrical STM-1 tributaries Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according
to Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
268. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN 50ms Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
269. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
270. Manual Switching via Management Interface Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
271. Configurable Wait Time to Restore Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.6 MS SHARED RING PROTECTION (MSBSHR)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
272. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according to Nc Nc Nc
Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
273. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN 50ms Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
274. Manual Switching via Management Interface Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
275. Revertive Switching Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
276. Configurable Wait Time to Restore Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
277. Maximum number of network elements in the ring Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
278. It is possible to configure (unprotected) low priority traffic Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
279. Event buffer C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
280. Heart Beat Function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
281. Re-boot function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
282. Real time clock function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
283. NSAP Address modification C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
284. Local Software Download C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
285. Remote Software Download C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
286. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
287. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
288. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
289. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
291. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
292. Display of VC-3 Signal ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. Display of VC-3 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
294. Display of VC-3 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
295. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
296. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPT C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
297. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
298. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
299. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.2 LOGS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
300. Alarm / Status Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
301. Performance Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
302. Configuration Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
303. Access Control Log C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.3 REDUNDANCY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
304. 1:N Tributary Card Protection 2 Mbit/s Nc Nc C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
305. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 34 Mbit/s Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
306. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 45 Mbit/s Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
307. 1:N or 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection STM-1 G.703 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
308. 1+1 Protection of all Central Traffic Carrying Cards C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
309. 1+1 Protection of Clock System C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
310. Duration LESS THAN 5s for card protection automatic switch over C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
311. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
312. Integrity Check of System Software C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
313. Configuration of Loop Back on port level on all PDH Interface Cards C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
314. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on STM-1 el. i/f C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
315. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on all STM-4 opt. interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
316. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
317. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
318. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
319. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
320. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
321. Configuration of Loop Back on the LPC functional block C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
322. Test Access Interface on all electrical interfaces Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
323. Test Access Interface on all optical interfaces Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
324. Optical Line Testing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.5 INVENTORY DATA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
325. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
326. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
327. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
328. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
329. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
330. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the C C C
Management System
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
331. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 Nc Nc Nc 09.331
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
332. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
333. Compliance with EN 50082 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
334. Compliance with EN 60950 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
335. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
336. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
337. System installation and h/w upgrade via front access possible C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
338. Number of racks in minimum configuration 1 1 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
339. Number of racks in maximum configuration 1 1 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER SUPPLY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
340. Nominal input voltage -48V C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
341. Minimum accepted input voltage -38V -38V -38V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
342. Maximum accepted input voltage -75V -75V -75V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 AVAILABILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
343. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional unit of IR IR IR ANNEX 1
the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 POWER CONSUMPTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
344. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption figures for IR IR IR ANNEX 1
each functional unit of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 SYSTEM MANUALS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
345. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
346. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
2 REFERENCES
2.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables Type
LSH-HRL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy/SDH) equipment functional
blocks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on
synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International
constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Mebverfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm
Storfestigkeit - Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts - und
Gewerbebereiche sowie Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm
Starfestigkeit - Teil 2: Industriebereich
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
The following tables list details of the power dissipation, weight, FITS
and size for the TN-4XE equipment.
TABLE 8-1
SUBRACK KEY SPECIFICATION DETAILS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS EXTERNAM DIMENSIONS (MM)
(SEE CHAPTER 4) CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TN-4XE Mux Maximum 18 kg (max.) 41 Height:
assembly (full fit): ▇▇▇ ▇ (▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇) ▇▇▇ mm (including fibretray)
NTEU70AA 20 kg (actual) 450 mm (excluding fibre tray)
Typical: 220 W An additional height of 50 mm if
2 Mbit's tributary cabling is
installed.
Width:
450 mm (excl. mounting flanges)
Depth:
280 mm (incl. doors/covers)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fan Tray ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ TBD Height:
NTEU55AA 75 mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-2
AGGREGATE UNIT KEY SPECIFICATION DETAILS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER CONSUMPTION WEIGHT FITS WIDTH
(SEE CHAPTER 5) (KG) (MM)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 1310 nm short haul optical Maximum: 40 W 1.875 2609 76.2
aggregate
NTEU20AA Typical: 36 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 1550 nm long haul optical Maximum: 40 W 1.875 2690 76.2
aggregate
NTEU21AA Typical: 36 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
with regard to TN-4XE / TN-16XE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS NOMINAL
(SEE CHAPTER 6) CONSUMPTION (KG) WIDTH
(MM)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 optical dual-port tributary Maximum: 20W 1.250 2184 25.4
unit (1310 nm, short haul)
NTEU10AA Typical: 17.5 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-10/140 Mbit/s tributary unit Maximum: 20 W ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ 25.4
NTEU13AA
Typical 17.5 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Mbit/s G.703 120 ohm tributary Maximum: 20 W TBD 500 25.4
unit
NTEU12AA Typical: 17.5 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-4
SERVICE INTERFACE MODULE (SIM) KEY DETAILS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS WIDTH
(SEE CHAPTER 4) CONSUMPTION (KG) (MM)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETHERNET SIM PCB ASSEMBLY ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ 28 25.4
NTEU6066
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-5
CONNECTOR PANEL KEY DETAILS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS WIDTH
(SEE CHAPTER 4) CONSUMPTION (KG) (MM)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
End Of Shelf Upper Maximum: 5 W 0.468 345 25.4
NTEU40AA
Typical: 3 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
End Of Shelf Lower Maximum: 8 W 0.468 439 25.4
NTEU41AA
Typical: 5 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 8-6
SPECIAL FUNCTION UNITS SPECIFICATION DETAILS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT POWER WEIGHT FITS EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
(SEE CHAPTER 7) CONSUMPTION (MM)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Engineering Orderwire Maximum: 12 W ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ TBD
(EOW) card
NTEU43AA Typical: 8 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 09.331
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0009
Chapter: 12
Item No.: 331
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stationary Use Conditions acc. To prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATIONAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The TN-4XE can operate in the following operating environments as specified in
ETS 300-019 class 3.1 (Temperature Controlled Locations) subject to the thermal
management limitations specified above.
NON-OPERATIONAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
For storage and transportation, the equipment withstands non-operational
temperatures between -40 and +70 DEG. C as specified in ETSI Standard
ETS 300-019.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
20 to 55% relative humidity or 3.6 kPa water vapor pressure, whichever is less,
over the normal temperature range; no condensation. Temperature: +4.5 DEG. to
+38 DEG. C.
SHORT-TERM OPERATION
Testing methodology IEC 68-2-56 Cb +30 DEG. C, 95% relative humidity.
NOTE: Short-term is defined to be no more than 72 consecutive hours and a total
of not more than 15 days in one year.
EXCHANGE ENVIRONMENT
Normal operating environment 0 to +40 DEG. C
Exceptional operating environment -5 to +45 DEG. C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 09.336
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0009
Chapter: 3
Item No.: 36, 43
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Timing Source Priority Levels
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Each of the selection circuits has a synchronization source hierarchy list.
These contain up to four synchronization sources listed in order of selection
preference. If the operator wishes to amend the hierarchy list all entries
must be re-entered.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 09.448
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0009
Chapter: 4
Item No.: 48
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Access to F2 as transparent channel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bytes F2 and F3 in the POH are reserved for use as 64 kbit/s user channels on a
VC-3 or VC-4 path. Nortel Networks' SDH products are in accordance with ITU-T
Recommendation. G.707 which specifies the requirements for the STM-N signals in
terms of bit rates, frame structures and support for the overhead bytes provided
therein. At the physical level, the position of the F2 byte in the STM-1 frames
of Nortel Networks SDH equipment are in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.707(1) and
ETS 300 147 (Apr 97). Nortel Networks' SDH products do not currently process the
F2 / F3 byte 64 kbit/s `user channel' of the VC-3 / VC-4 Path Overhead and hence
this feature is not used in present applications. The Tx direction of the F2 and
F3 bytes are set to all ones, and the Rx direction is ignored.
The F2 / F3 byte 64 kbit/s `user channel' feature may be introduced at a later
date with a S/W upgrade.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO
--------------------
(1) ITU-T G.707 (03/96) Recommendation is a merged revised version of
Recommendation G.707, G708 and G.709 approved in 03/93.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 09.782
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0009
Chapter: 7
Item No.: 82, 83, 84
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Performance Management for Tandem Connection
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At the moment Performance Monitoring is executed at the termination points of
the relevant services. Hence it's possible to determine the QoS for the whole
connection.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION TM-N/1
------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-RFX-0010
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description TM-N-1-10
------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of the TM-N/1
Equipment, wheras N=1, 4
The equipment shall mainly be applied as SDH trail or
connection terminating mux at customer premises.
------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
1 REQUESTED FEATURES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 Mbit/s G.703 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 Mbit/s G.704 frame monitoring option on incoming traffic C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 2 Mbit/s, retiming 250 us buffer
4. 34 Mbit/s G.703 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. 45 Mbit/s G.703 Nc C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. STM-1 G.703 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. S-1.1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
8. STM-1 G.703 Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. S-1.1 Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. L-1.1 Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. S-4.1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. L-4.1 Nc Nc Nc 10.112
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Up to LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN electrical 2 Mbit/s ports 252 252 252
can be equipped
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Up to LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN electrical 34 Mbit/s 24 24 24
ports can be equipped
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Up to LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN electrical 45 Mbit/s 24 24 24
ports can be equipped
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Up to LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN el. 155 Mbit/s ports can 8 8 8
be equipped
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Bi-directional Connections on VC-12 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Bi-directional Connections on VC-3 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Bi-directional Connections on VC-4 level C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 Nc C C
(VC-4-4c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.1 HIGHER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. HO termination of LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN * VC-4 IR IR IR 10.2
equivalents from aggregate
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. HO add/drop of LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN * VC-4 4 4 4 10.2
equivalents from aggregate west
\-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. HO add/drop of LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN * VC-4 4 4 4 10.2
equivalents from aggregate west
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2 LOWER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. LO termination of LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN * VC-4 IR IR IR 10.2
equivalents from aggregate
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. LO add/drop of LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN * VC-4 4 4 4 10.2
equivalents from aggregate west
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
26. LO add/drop of LESS THAN t.b.d. GREATER THAN * VC-4 4 4 4 10.2
equivalents from aggregate west
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. STM-N timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. 2048 kHz timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
30. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
33. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) Nc Nc Nc 10.333
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇. Autonomous Timing Source Selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. Manual Timing Source Selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. One 2048 kHz timing output port C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. Configurable timing output squelch function C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
38. STM-N timing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
39. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
40. Priority List (at least 7 entries) Nc Nc Nc 10.333
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇. Autonomous timing source selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. Manual Timing Source selection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. F- Interface (RS 232) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. Q I/F (Ethernet) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. Qecc via any ECCR on optical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. Qecc via any ECCM on optical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. Qecc via any ECCR on electrical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. Qecc via any ECCM on electrical interfaces C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. Domain Partitioning Repair function
52. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address prefix) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte C C C
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via other
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
operator's SDH network)
55. F2 Byte can be inserted / extracted via V.11 Interface Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via
bridge and other operator's SDH network)
4.2 O & M INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. Remote Control Outputs Nc Nc Nc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. Card LED support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. Subrack LED support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Rack Alarm support C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
61. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. at any MST C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. at any RST C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. at any VC-4 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. at any VC-3 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. at any VC-12 TTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. at any AU-4 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. at any VC-3 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. at any VC-12 CTP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 10.570
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. for any TU-3 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 10.570
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. for any TU-12 Tandem Connection Nc Nc Nc 10.570
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. Threshold Crossing Notification C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical interface C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. Detection of OOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. Detection of LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity calculation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
6.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. Detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. Detection of Signal Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity error
calculation C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. Detection of FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity calculations C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Detection of AU-LOP C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Detection of AU-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
6.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.6 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Detection of EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.7 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Detection of EBER C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.8 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
119. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.9 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.10 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.11 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
141. Detection of Trib.-AIS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Detection of Trib.-LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Detection of Trib.-LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS, Trib.-LOF C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.12 SETS AND SETPI
145. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. Detection of SETG - Hold C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Detection of SETG - Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Detection of Sync. Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. T4 Squelch upon detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade
152. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Detection of Sync. LOS C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.13 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
154. Detection of Remote Control Input Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.14 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
157. Detection of Secondary Power Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Detection of Primary Power Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
160. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
162. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C C C
\-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Detection of Card Out C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch etc.) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. Detection of Wrong Card C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. Network Protection Switch Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 STATUS EVENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
168. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. System Software Integrity Fail C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. Laser Restart for Test C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Synchronisation Source Quality Change C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. External Synchronisation Output Squelched C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Section Layer Protection Switch Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Network Protection Switch Event C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Card Protection Switch Active C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Software Download in Progress C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Software Download Failure C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. Software Download Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
186. Card Restoration Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Electronic Label Update C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent C C C
alarms)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. Alarm Inversion Facility C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Performance of the alarm throughput > 10 alarms per second C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant alarm C C C
per port
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant alarm C C C
group per card
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant alarm C C C
group per NE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per functional C C C
unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. Enable / Disable Laser C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SoC SoC SoC Ref. No.
T1 T2 T3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. Set Threshold B2-EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. Set Threshold B1-EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.5 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. Set Threshold EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.6 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Set Threshold EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.7 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.8 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Set Threshold EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.9 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Set Threshold EBER C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 NETWORK PROTECTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN100ms C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-3)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
242. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN300ms C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
245. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-12)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Switch-Over Completion Time LESS THAN300ms C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
253. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Event buffer C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Heart Beat Function C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256. Re-boot function C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
257. Real time clock function C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. NSAP Address modification C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. Local Software Download C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Remote Software Download C C C
V--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. Display of VC-3 Signal ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. Display of VC-3 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
269. Display of VC-3 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
270. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
271. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPT C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
272. Display of VC-12 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
273. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
274. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 LOGS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
275. Alarm / Status Log C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
276. Performance Log C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
277. Configuration Log C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
278. Access Control Log C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.3 REDUNDANCY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
279. 1:N Tributary Card Protection 2 Mbit/s NC NC C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
280. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 34 Mbit/s NC C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
281. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 45 Mbit/s NC C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
282. 1:N or 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection STM-1 G.703 NC C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
283. 1+1 Protection of Clock System C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
284. Duration LESS THAN5s for card protection automatic switch over C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
285. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
286. Integrity Check of System Software C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
287. Configuration of Loop Back on port level on all PDH Interface Cards C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
288. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on STM-1 el. i/f C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
289. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on all STM-4 opt. Interfaces C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
291. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
292. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
293. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
294. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
295. Configuration of Loop Back on the LPC functional block C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
296. Test Access Interface on all electrical interfaces NC NC NC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
297. Test Access Interface on all optical interfaces NC NC NC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
298. Optical Line Testing C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.5 INVENTORY DATA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
299. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
300. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
301. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
302. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
303. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
304. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the C C C
Management System
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
With regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
305. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 NC NC NC 10.10305
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
306. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
307. Compliance with EN 50082 C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
308. Compliance with EN 60950 C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
309. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
310. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
311. Wall mountable version NC NC NC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
312. System upgrade or modification can be done without rear access C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 POWER SUPPLY
313. Nominal input voltage -48V C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
314. Minimum accepted input voltage -38V -38V -38V
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
315. Maximum accepted input voltage -75V -75V -75V
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 AVAILABILITY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
316. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional unit of IR IR IR ANNEX 1
the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER CONSUMPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
317. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption figures for IR IR IR ANNEX 1
each functional unit of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 SYSTEM MANUALS
318. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
319. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
2 REFERENCES
2.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables Type
LSH-HRL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy /SDH) equipment functional
blocks
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on
synchronous digital hierarchy
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters
and objectives for International constant
Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the
Primary Rate
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Me(beta)verfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und
Gewerbebereiche owie Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 2: Industriebereich
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With regard to TN-4XE
▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇ - ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT MAXIMUM
FIGURE POWER
CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
TN-4XE Muxassembly NTEU70AA 41 253 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 1310nm short haul NTEU20AA 1.875 40 W
optical aggregate
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4 1550 nm long haul NTEU21AA 1.875 40 W
optical aggregate
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 optical dual-port NTEU10AA 1.250 20 W
tributary unit (1310 nm,
short haul)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1e/140 Mbit/s NTEU13AA TBD 20 W
tributary unit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇ ▇▇▇▇/▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ 500 20 W
tributary unit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇ ▇▇▇▇/▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ 500 20 W
tributary unit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETHERNET SIM PCB Assembly NTEU6006 28
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
End Of Shelf Upper NTEU40AA 345 5 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
End Of Shelf Lower NTEU41AA 439 8 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Engineering Orderwire NTEU43AA TBD 12 W
(EOW) card
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
end of document
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 10.2
Nortel Dasa otel.o Document No.: ST-frx-0010
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - 39 Chapter: 2
60528 Frankfurt / Main
Item No.: 21,23, 25,26
---------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-4XE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Add/ drop capacity of n-VC4 equivalents
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 * VC4 East,
4 * VC4 West,
8 * VC4 South can be connected in any combination.
With Regard to TN-1X
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION TM-N/1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0010
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description TM-N-1-10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of the TM-N/1 Equipment, wheras N=1, 4
The equipment shall mainly be applied as SDH trail or
connection terminating mux at customer premises.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
1 REQUESTED FEATURES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 Mbit/s G.703 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 Mbit/s G.704 frame monitoring option on incoming traffic C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 2 Mbit/s, retiming 250 us buffer C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. 34 Mbit/s G.703 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. 45 Mbit/s G.703 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. STM-1 G.703 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. S-1.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. ▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇. ▇-▇.▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. L-1.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. S-4.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. L-4.1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 2 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR 10.113
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 34 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR 10.113
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 45 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR 10.113
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Up to (t.b.d.) el. 155 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR 10.113
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Bi-directional Connections on VC-12 level C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Bi-directional Connections on VC-3 level C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Bi-directional Connections on VC-4 level NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 NC NC NC
(VC-4-4c)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.1 HIGHER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. HO termination of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate IR IR IR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. HO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate west IR IR IR 10.222
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. HO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate west IR IR IR 10.222
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2 LOWER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. LO termination of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate IR IR IR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. LO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate west IR IR IR 10.225
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. LO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate west IR IR IR 10.225
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. STM-N timing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. 2048 kHz timing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
33. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) NC NC NC 10.333
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34. Autonomous Timing Source Selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. Manual Timing Source Selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. One 2048 kHz timing output port C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. Configurable timing output squelch function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. STM-N timing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
39. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40. Priority List (at least 7 entries) NC NC NC 10.333
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
41. Autonomous timing source selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. Manual Timing Source selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. F- Interface (RS 232) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. Q I/F (Ethernet) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. Qecc via any ECCR on optical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. Qecc via any ECCM on optical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. Qecc via any ECCR on electrical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. Qecc via any ECCM on electrical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. Domain Partitioning Repair function
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
52. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address prefix) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte C C C
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via other
operator's SDH network)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
55. F2 Byte can be inserted / extracted via V.11 Interface NC NC NC
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via
bridge and other operator's SDH network)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 O & M INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. Remote Control Outputs C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. Card LED support C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. Subrack LED support C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Rack Alarm support C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
61. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. at any MST C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. at any RST C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. at any VC-4 TTP NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. at any VC-3 TTP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. at any VC-12 TTP C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. at any AU-4 CTP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. at any VC-3 CTP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. at any VC-12 CTP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection NC NC NC 10.570
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. for any TU-3 Tandem Connection NC NC NC 10.570
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. for any TU-12 Tandem Connection NC NC NC 10.570
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. Threshold Crossing Notification C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. Detection of OOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. Detection of LOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity calculation C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. Detection of MS-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. Detection of Signal Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity error
calculation C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. Detection of FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity calculations C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Detection of AU-LOP C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Detection of AU-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.6 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Detection of EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.7 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Detection of EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.8 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
119. Detection of HP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Detection of HP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.9 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.10 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of LP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Detection of LP-FERF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.11 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141. Detection of Trib.-AIS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Detection of Trib.-LOS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Detection of Trib.-LOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS, Trib.-LOF C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.12 SETS AND SETPI
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. Detection of SETG - Hold C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Detection of SETG - Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Detection of Sync. Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. T4 Squelch upon detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
152. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Detection of Sync. LOS C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.13 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
154. Detection of Remote Control Input Active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.14 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
157. Detection of Secondary Power Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Detection of Primary Power Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
160. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
162. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Detection of Card Out C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch etc.) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. Detection of Wrong Card C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. Network Protection Switch Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 STATUS EVENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
168. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. System Software Integrity Fail C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. Laser Restart for Test C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Synchronisation Source Quality Change C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. External Synchronisation Output Squelched C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Section Layer Protection Switch Active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Network Protection Switch Event C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Card Protection Switch Active C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Access Log Capacity Exceeded C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Software Download in Progress C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Software Download Failure C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. Software Download Complete C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
186. Card Restoration Complete C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Electronic Label Update C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent C C C
alarms)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. Alarm Inversion Facility C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Performance of the alarm throughput > 10 alarms per second C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant alarm C C C
per port
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant alarm C C C
group per card
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant alarm C C C
group per NE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per functional C C C
unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 GENERAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. Enable / Disable Laser C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. Set Threshold B2-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. Set Threshold B1-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.5 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.6 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ (per C C C
Path)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of LP-SLM (per C C C
Path)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.7 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. Set Threshold B3-EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.8 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.9 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Set Threshold EBER C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 NETWORK PROTECTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 100ms C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
242. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
245. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-12)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Configurable Hold-Off Time C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252. Manual Switching via Management Interface C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
253. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Event buffer C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Heart Beat Function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256. Re-boot function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
257. Real time clock function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. NSAP Address modification C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. Local Software Download C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Remote Software Download C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. Display of VC-3 Signal ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. Display of VC-3 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
269. Display of VC-3 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
270. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
271. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPT C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
272. Display of VC-12 Path Trace at LPOM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
273. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPOM C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
274. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 LOGS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
275. Alarm / Status Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
276. Performance Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
277. Configuration Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
278. Access Control Log C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.3 REDUNDANCY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
279. 1:N Tributary Card Protection 2 Mbit/s C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
280. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇/▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇/▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. 1:N or 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection ▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇ ▇ ▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇. 1+1 Protection of Clock System C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
284. Duration less than 5s for card protection automatic switch over C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
285. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
286. Integrity Check of System Software C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
287. Configuration of Loop Back on port level on all PDH Interface Cards C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
288. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on STM-1 el. i/f C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
289. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on all STM-4 opt. interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
291. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
292. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH C C C
Interface Cards
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
293. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface C C C
Cards
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
294. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
295. Configuration of Loop Back on the LPC functional block C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
296. Test Access Interface on all electrical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
297. Test Access Interface on all optical interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
298. Optical Line Testing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.5 INVENTORY DATA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
299. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
300. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
301. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
302. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
303. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
304. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the C C C
Management System
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
305. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 NC NC NC 10.10305
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
306. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
307. Compliance with EN 50082 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
308. Compliance with EN 60950 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
309. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
310. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
311. wall mountable version NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
312. system upgrade or modification can be done without rear access C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 POWER SUPPLY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
313. Nominal input voltage -48V C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
314. Minimum accepted input voltage -40V -40V -40V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
315. Maximum accepted input voltage -72V -72V -72V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 AVAILABILITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
316. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional unit of IR IR IR Annex 1
the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
317. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption figures for IR IR IR Annex 1
each functional unit of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 SYSTEM MANUALS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
318. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
319. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
2 REFERENCES
2.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables
Type LSH-HRL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional
blocks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on
synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International constant
Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Me(beta)verfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereiche sowie
Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 2: Industriebereich
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇ - ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT FIGURE MAXIMUM POWER CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYNC MUX REL2.5 SHELF 25GMU00750GWV 3174 11 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PBA TRFC ACCESS 25UJJ00750GVZ 228 0 W
MOD.75R BT43
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLEXIBLE ACCESS MODULE 25UJJ00750GWX 60
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HIGH SPEED TRFC 25UJJ00750GWY 114 1 W
ACCESS 120R
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STAR CARD 75R BT43 25UJJ00750GWZ 115 0 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STATION SERVICE CARD 25UJJ00750GXC 140 0 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HI-SPD TRFC MOD 25UJJ00750HTD 139 1 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34MBIT MULT VC12 I/F 25UJU00750HJZ 1842 8,05 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2M TRIB 75R ASSY Q2M 25UJU00750HVT 0 8,2 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBRACK CONTROLLER PBA 25UMN00750GXD 3620 11 W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYNC REL 2.5 POWER 25UPW00750HAY 1879 0 W
SUPPLY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PAYLOAD MANAGER NTKD10AA 0 10,1 W
(MIXED PAYLOADS)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 1 INCH OPTICAL TRIB NTKD11AA 0 7
(MIXED PAYLOADS)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 1 INCH NTKD12AA 0 7
ELECTRICAL TRIB
(MIXED PAYLOADS)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34/45M VC3 TRIBUTARY NTKD16AA 0 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
end of document
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 10.113
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0010
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 1
Item No.: 13/14/15/16
---------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tributary Interface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The TN-1X provides the following tributaries:
- 2048 kbit/s electrical ports
-- up to sixty-three 2048 kbit/s electrical ports
- 34368 kbit/s or 45736 kbit/s electrical ports
-- up to four 34368 kbit/s or 45736 kbit/s ports. Only three of these can
carry traffic at any time.
- 34368 kbit/s electrical ports (16x2)
-- up to four 34368 kbit/s electrical ports, each port providing access to
sixteen 2048 kbit/s signals
- STM-1 tributary ports
-- up to four STM-1 optical or electrical tributary ports)
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 10.222
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-frx-0010
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 2
Item No.: 22/23
---------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HO add/drop of (t.b.d.) VC-4 equivalents from aggregate east / west
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The connection functionality of the TN-1X relates to the management of
bidirectional VC-12 and VC-3 through and drop connections on the NE. The total
traffic capacity for the multiplexer is four AU-4 payload. The containers within
this payload (VC-3, VC-12) can be dropped from the aggregates to any suitable
tributary unit, or can be through connected. It is possible that the number of
available tributary ports will exceed the number of aggregate ports, but the
total bandwidth for the Network Element (63 x VC-12,3 x VC-3 or a combination of
these) cannot be exceeded.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 10.225
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-frx-0010
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 2
Item No.: 25/26
---------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LO add/drop of (t.b.d.) VC-4 equivalents from aggregate east / west
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The connection functionality of the TN-1X relates to the management of
bidirectional VC-12 and VC-3 through and drop connections on the NE. The total
traffic capacity for the multiplexer is four AU-4 payload. The containers within
this payload (VC-3, VC-12) can be dropped from the aggregates to any suitable
tributary unit, or can be through connected. It is possible that the number of
available tributary ports will exceed the number of aggregate ports, but the
total bandwidth for the NE (63 x VC-12,3 x VC-3 or a combination of these)
cannot be exceeded.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 10.333
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-frx-0010
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ / ▇▇▇▇ Chapter: 3
Item No.: 33/40
---------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Timing Source Quality Levels
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The priority list has at least 4 entries.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 10.570
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
Chapter: 5
Item No.: 70, 71, 72
---------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Performance Management for Tandem Connection
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At the moment Performance Monitoring is executed at the termination points of
the relevant services. Hence it's possible to determine the QoS for the whole
connection.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
---------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
Supplier: Reference No.: 10.10305
Nortel Dasa
Network Systems GmbH & Co. KG otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00010
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - 39
60528 Frankfurt / Main Chapter: 10
Item No.: 305
---------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
With Regard to TN-1X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stationary Use Conditions acc. To prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
External dimensions conform to draft ETSI standard pr ETS 300-119 part 4.
The subrack is designed to meet the requirements of ETSI standard ETS 300-019 as
follows:
Storage: Class 1.2
Transport: Class 2.3
Operation: Class 3.1E.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 11.453
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
Chapter: 4
Item No.: 53
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Access to F2 as transparent channel
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bytes F2 and F3 in the POH are reserved for use as 64 kbit/s user channels on a
VC-3 or VC-4 path. Nortel Networks' SDH products are in accordance with ITU-T
Recommendation. G.707 which specifies the requirements for the STM-N signals in
terms of bit rates, frame structures and support for the overhead bytes provided
therein. At the physical level, the position of the F2 byte in the STM-1 frames
of Nortel Networks SDH equipment are in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.707(1) and
ETS 300 147 (Apr 97). Nortel Networks' SDH products do not currently process the
F2 / F3 byte 64 kbit/s `user channel' of the VC-3 / VC-4 Path Overhead and hence
this feature is not used in present applications. The Tx direction of the F2 and
F3 bytes are set to all ones, and the Rx direction is ignored.
The F2 / F3 byte 64 kbit/s `user channel' feature may be introduced at a later
date with a S/W upgrade.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO
---------------------------------
(1) ITU-T G.707 (03/96) Recommendation is a merged revised version of
Recommendation G.707, G708 and G.709 approved in 03/93.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 11.788
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-00011
Chapter: 7
Item No.: 88, 89, 90
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Performance Management for Tandem Connection
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At the moment Performance Monitoring is executed at the termination points of
the relevant services. Hence it's possible to determine the QoS for the whole
connection.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION ADM-64/4
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0007
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature description ADM-16-4-10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of ADM-16/4 Equipment
The equipment shall mainly be applied for combining VC-4 add/drop to/from backbone
rings.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REQUESTED FEATURES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 ELECTRICAL TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. STM-1 G.703 NC NC C 07.1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 OPTICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. S-1.1 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. L-1.1 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. L-1.2 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. S-4.1 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. L-4.1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. L-4.2 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. V-4.2 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. S-16.1 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. L-16.1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. L-16.2 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. V-16.2 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. S-16.1 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. L-16.1 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. L-16.2 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. V-16.2 NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. STM-64 S-64.2 (Amplifier required) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. STM-64 L-64.2 (Amplifier required) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. STM-64 L-64.3 (Amplifier required) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. STM-64 V-64.2 (Amplifier required) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. STM-64 V-64.3 (Amplifier required) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. Coloured Interfaces 100 GHz channel spacing C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. Coloured Interfaces 50 GHz channel spacing NC NC C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. STM-4 S-4.1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. STM-16 S-16.1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. STM-16 S-16.2 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-16 L-16.1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-16 S-16.2 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. Bi-directional Connections C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 C
(VC-4-4c)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 C
(VC-4-16c)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. High order add/drop capacity of 64 * VC-4 equivalents from C
aggregate east
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30. High order add/drop capacity of 64 * VC-4 equivalents from C
aggregate west
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. High order add/drop capacity of 64 * VC-4 equivalents from C
aggregate east and west
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. High Order aggregate to aggregate connectivity of 64 STM-1 C
equivalents (east and west)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
33. STM-N timing C C C STM-64
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34. 2048 kHz timing C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) Nc C C Rel. 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
39. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40. Autonomous Timing Source Selection acc. to highest quality and C C C
highest priority
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
41. Manual Timing Source Selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. One 2048 kHz timing output port C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. Configurable timing output squelch function C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. STM-N C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support) Nc C C Rel. 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. Priority List (at least 7 entries) Nc Nc Nc 6 entries
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. Autonomous timing source selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. Manual Timing Source selection C C C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 OVERHEAD ACCESS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 OVERHEAD BYTES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. Access to F1 as transparent channel NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. Access to E1 as transparent channel NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. Access to F2 as transparent channel NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 OVERHEAD ACCESS INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
52. 64 K on V.11 (towards either MSOH or RSOH of aggregate interface) NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. 64 K on V.11 (towards POH of tributary interface) NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3 OVERHEAD CHANNEL CROSS CONNECTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. 64 K between synchronous ports and towards external interface NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE C
TWO MODES ARE SUPPORTED:
a) VIA OSC. (THIS REQUIRES MOR TO BE PRESENT
b) NETWORK EOW BASED ON PACKETISED VOICE OVER OSI COMMS
CARRIED BY EMBEDDED SDH DCC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1 INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
55. 1 * 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. 2 * 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. Selective Call C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. Conference Call (up to four participants) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. F- Interface (RS 232) C 07.59
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
61. Qecc via any ECC(R) on optical interfaces C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. Qecc via any ECC(M) on optical interfaces C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. Qecc via any ECC(R) on electrical interfaces NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. Qecc via any ECC(M) on electrical interfaces NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) NC NC C 07.6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. Domain Partitioning Repair function NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address prefix) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte of SDH
NC tributary interface (Application: for transparent
transmission of ECC via other operator's SDH network)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 O & M INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. Remote Control Outputs C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. Card LED support C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. Subrack LED support C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. Rack Alarm support C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. at any VC-4 TTP NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. at any MST C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. at any RST C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. at any AU-4 CTP C 7.79
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection IPPM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. Threshold Crossing Notification C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical
interface C (STM-64 ONLY)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. Detection of OOF C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. Detection of LOF C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity calculation C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Detection of MS-AIS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Detection of Signal Degrade C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity error
calculation C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of FERF C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity calculations NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of AU-LOP C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of AU-AIS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Detection of HP-SLM NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Detection of HP-FERF C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.6 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of HP-SLM N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of HP-FERF N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.7 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Detection of Trib.-AIS N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
119. Detection of Trib.-LOS N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Detection of Trib.-LOF N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS,
Trib.-LOF N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.8 SETS AND SETPI
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of SETG - Hold C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of SETG - Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of Sync. Degrade C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Detection of Sync. LOS C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.9 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130. Detection of Remote Control Input Active C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.10 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Detection of Secondary Power Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of Primary Power Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Detection of Card Out C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch C etc.)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Detection of Wrong Card C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Network Protection Switch Failure C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 STATUS EVENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145. System Software Integrity Fail (NES REBOOT IN THE EVENT OF
FAILURE) NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. Laser Restart for Test NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Synchronisation Source Quality Change C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. External Synchronisation Output Squelched C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. Section Layer Protection Switch Active C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
152. Network Protection Switch Event C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Card Protection Switch Active C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
154. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded (CAPACITY IS NEVER
EXCEEDED) NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
157. Access Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Software Download in Progress C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Software Download Failure C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
160. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Software Download Complete C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
162. Card Restoration Complete C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Electronic Label Update C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent
NC alarms)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. Alarm Inversion Facility NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
168. Performance of the alarm throughput > 10 alarms per second NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm C per port C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm C group per card C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic relevant
alarm C group per NE C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per
functional C unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Enable / Disable Laser NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. Set Threshold B2-EBER C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Set Threshold B1-EBER C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Set Threshold B3-EBER N/A N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ N/A N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-▇▇▇
(per ▇/▇ ▇/▇ ▇▇▇▇) ▇/▇ ▇/▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of HP-SLM
(per ▇/▇ ▇/▇ ▇▇▇▇) ▇/▇ ▇/▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
186. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) N/A N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) N/A N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Set Threshold B3-EBER C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 NETWORK PROTECTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 HIGHER ORDER LINEAR VC TRAIL PROTECTION (SINGLE ENDED)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. Detection Criterion Signal Degrade (B3 Bit Error Rate) NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. Configurable Hold-Off Time NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Manual Switching via Management Interface NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 100ms NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. Configurable Hold-Off Time NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. Manual Switching via Management Interface NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NC NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 1+1 LINE PROTECTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. MSP function on all aggregates C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. MSP function on all optical tributaries C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. MSP function on all electrical STM-1 tributaries N/A N/A C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according
to C Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 50ms C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. Manual Switching via Management Interface C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.4 MS SHARED RING PROTECTION (MSBSHR)-
FOLLOWING ANSWERS GIVEN FOR MS-SPRING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Detection Criterion Signal Fail and Signal Degrade according
to C Section 2.3 of ITU-T rec. G.783 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 50ms C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. Manual Switching via Management Interface C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Revertive Switching C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Configurable Wait Time to Restore C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Maximum number of network elements in the ring 16 32
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. It is possible to configure (unprotected) low priority traffic NC NC C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.1 GENERAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. Event buffer C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Heart Beat Function C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Re-boot function C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Real time clock function C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. NSAP Address modification C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Local Software Download C Supported,
but NUM
recommended
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Remote Software Download C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPT N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.2 LOGS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. Alarm / Status Log C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. Performance Log C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. Configuration Log C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Access Control Log C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.3 REDUNDANCY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection STM-1 G.703 N/A N/A Tbc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. 1+1 Protection of all Central Traffic Carrying Cards C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. 1+1 Protection of Clock System C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Duration less than 5s for card protection automatic switch over C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
242. Integrity Check of System Software N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Configuration of Loop Back on all PDH Interface Cards N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH Interface Cards NC NC TBC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
245. Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH Interface Cards NC NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Test Interface on all electrical interfaces NC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Optical Line Testing C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.5 INVENTORY DATA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
253. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the C
Management System
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 C PrETS 300
019-3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.2 257. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. Compliance with EN 50082 C EN 50082-1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Compliance with EN 60950 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. System installation and h/w upgrade via front access possible C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER SUPPLY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264. Nominal input voltage -48V C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. Minimum accepted input voltage -39 V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. Maximum accepted input voltage -75 V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 AVAILABILITY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional IR IR IR Attached
unit of the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
268.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 POWER CONSUMPTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
269. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption IR IR IR Attached
figures for each functional unit of the offered equipment according
to the template as attached in Annex 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 SYSTEM MANUALS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
270. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD ftp format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
271. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD ftp format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFERENCES
1.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
====================================================================================================================================
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables Type LSH-HRL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy /SDH) equipment functional blocks
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on synchronous
digital hierarchy
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International constant
Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication centres
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to telecommunication network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Messverfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der Informationstechnik
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereiche sowie Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 2: Industriebereich
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
====================================================================================================================================
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 07.8100
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
Chapter: 8
Item No.: 100, 101, 107, 108, 109
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of HP-Trace Invalid
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This functionality is available for 34Mbit/s signal only.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / /T1 / /T2 / /after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 07.81123
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
Chapter: 8
Item No.: 123
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
There isn't any separation between the sync. Degrade and the Excessive Sync.
Degrade. The next stage after the Sync. Degrade is detected, it will become the
holdover status and the holdover alarm will be raised.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / /T1 / /T2 / /after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 07.12217
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
Chapter: 1
Item No.: 17, 18
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coloured Interfaces 100/50 GHz Channel Spacing
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The next generation TN-16X DWDM Transmitter and Regenerator provide a high
performance tight wavelength optical signal aligned with the 200 GHz ITU-T grid
with a wavelength tolerance of +/- 0.25 nm and provisionable output power. Thus,
TN-16X terminal equipment may be used in a variety of configurations, providing
a flexible system that may be integrated and expanded as customers require.
Together with appropriate DWDM optical couplers, the TN-16X DWDM hardware
provides a complete Nortel DWDM system with information capacity of up to 20
Gb/s based on an eight wavelength plan.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / /T1 / /T2 / /after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 07.82150
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
Chapter: 8
Item No.: 150, 151,152, 153
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Status Events Log Capacity Exceeded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Log reports are generated when an event occurs within the TN-16X system and
are generated by both the Network element (NE) and the Operations controller
(OPC). Each report generated is stored for later viewing and/or printing.
Although many logs are informational only, some indicate trouble conditions.
In these cases, trouble-clearing procedures are provided.
The OPC contains a fixed amount of archive storage (5 megabytes) for the
storage of both OPC and network element logs. When this storage is full, new
logs overwrite existing logs. The logs collected by the OPC can be viewed
using the OPC Event Browser tool. When there is a lot of NE log activity the
log is periodically transferred to the OPC (when the size threshold is
crossed) to eliminate the possibility of lost data.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / /T1 / /T2 / /after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: Nortel Dasa Network Systems Reference No.: 07.92179
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0007
Chapter: 9
Item No.: 179
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The threshold value is fixed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / /T1 / /T2 / /after T2
/ / Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION TN-1C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-RFX-0010
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME System Feature Description TM-N-1-10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the features of the TM-N/1
Equipment, wheras N=1, 4
The equipment shall mainly be applied as SDH trail
or connection terminating mux at customer premises.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 REQUESTED FEATURES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 INTERFACE TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2 Mbit/s G.703 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. 2 Mbit/s G.704 frame monitoring option on incoming traffic (with C
Rel. 3 HW)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. 2 Mbit/s, retiming 250 us buffer C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. 34 Mbit/s G.703 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. 45 Mbit/s G.703 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. STM-1 G.703 NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. S-1.1 NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 AGGREGATE INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. STM-1 G.703 NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. S-1.1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. L-1.1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. S-4.1 NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. L-4.1 NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 EQUIPPING OF INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.1 TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 2 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR
16 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS CAN BE EQUIPPED WITH 8 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS
ON THE MAIN BOARD AND 8 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS ON THE TRIBUTARY
EXTENSION CARD TN-1C REL. 5 - UP TO 32 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS CAN
BE EQUIPPED WITH 8 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS ON THE MAIN BOARD AND
24 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS ON THE TRIBUTARY EXTENSION CARD
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 34 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR
2 X 34/45 MBIT/S PORTS CAN BE EQUIPPED ON THE TRIBUTARY
EXTENSION CARD (IN ADDITION TO THE 8 X 2 MBIT/S PORTS ON
THE MAIN BOARD)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Up to (t.b.d.) electrical 45 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR
SEE RESPONSE TO 1.3.1 (14) ABOVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. Up to (t.b.d.) el. 155 Mbit/s ports can be equipped IR
NOT APPLICABLE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 CONNECTION TYPES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Bi-directional Connections on VC-12 level C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Bi-directional Connections on VC-3 level C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19. Bi-directional Connections on VC-4 level C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Bi-directional Connections of contiguously concatenated VC-4 NA
(VC-4-4c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.1 HIGHER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21. HO termination of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate IR IR IR
THE FOLLOWING BI-DIRECTIONAL CONNECTIONS ARE SUPPORTED:
o NO CONNECTION
IF THERE IS NO CONNECTION, THE CHANNEL IS NOT IN USE.
THEREFORE NO LOW ORDER PATH (LP) ALARMS AND BNO TU ALARMS
(TU-LOP AND TU-AIS) ARE REPORTED FOR THIS CHANNEL.
o ADD/DROP CONNECTION
A TRIBUTARY SIGNAL IS CONNECTED TO A SPECIFIC CHANNEL (TU)
IN THE STM-1 SIGNAL. THE 34/45 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES ARE
ASSOCIATED WITH A TU-3, WHILE THE 2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES ARE
ASSOCIATED WITH TU-12S. FOR UNPROTECTED CONNECTIONS, THE
TRIBUTARY IS CONNECTED TO ONE OF THE AGGREGATE PORTS. FOR
PROTECTED CONNECTIONS AN ALTERNATIVE PAYLOAD INSTANCE IN
THE OTHER AGGREGATE PORTS FOR PATH PROTECTION IS SPECIFIED.
o THROUGH CONNECTION
A THROUGH CONNECTION CONNECTS MATCHING CHANNELS BETWEEN AGGREGATES
A AND B
o VC-4 PASSTHROUGH CONNECTION
THIS CONNECTS THE VC-4 CONTAINED IN THE STM-1 SIGNAL
BETWEEN AGGREGATES A AND B AND WHEN PROVISIONED ALL OTHER
PASS CONNECTIONS MUST BE FREE. WHEN A VC-4 PASSTHROUGH
CONNECTION IS PROVISIONED, ONLY THE RS, MS AND AU-AIS
ALARMS ARE ENABLED.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22. HO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate
west IR IR IR
SEE RESPONSE TO 2.2.1 (21) ABOVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23. HO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate
west IR IR IR
SEE RESPONSE TO 2.2.1 (21) ABOVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2 LOWER ORDER CONNECTIVITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24. LO termination of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate IR IR IR
SEE RESPONSE TO 2.2.1 (21) ABOVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25. LO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate
west IR IR IR
SEE RESPONSE TO 2.2.1 (21) ABOVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26. LO add/drop of (t.b.d.) * VC-4 equivalents from aggregate
west IR IR IR
SEE RESPONSE TO 2.2.1 (21) ABOVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SYNCHRONISATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT TIMING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.1 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27. STM-N timing C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. 2048 kHz timing NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29. Internal Oscillator acc. to G.813 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.2 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30. STM-N Timing at all SDH i/fs (Timing Marker Support) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31. 2048 kHz timing, fixed to G.811 quality NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32. 2048 kHz timing, configurable timing source quality NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.3 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
33. Priority List of (at least 6 entries) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1.4 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34. Autonomous Timing Source Selection C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
35. Manual Timing Source Selection C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 EXTERNAL TIMING OUTPUT (T4)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.1 TIMING OUTPUT PORT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
36. One 2048 kHz timing output port NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. Configurable timing output squelch function NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 TIMING SOURCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. STM-N timing C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 TIMING SOURCE QUALITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
39. STM-N Timing (Timing Marker Support) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.4 TIMING SOURCE PRIORITY LEVELS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40. Priority List (at least 7 entries) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 SELECTION ALGORITHMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
41. Autonomous timing source selection NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
42. Manual Timing Source selection NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
43. F- Interface (RS 232) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
44. Q I/F (Ethernet) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45. Q- interface as gateway to the EMS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
46. Qecc via any ECCR on optical interfaces C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
47. Qecc via any ECCM on optical interfaces (with Rel 5 - C) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
48. Qecc via any ECCR on electrical interfaces NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
49. Qecc via any ECCM on electrical interfaces NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50. Qecc Routing (level 2 IS-IS acc. to ISO 10589-8473) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51. Domain Partitioning Repair function C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
52. Definition of Manual Adjacencies (NSAP of dedicated NE) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
53. Manual definition of reachable addresses (set address
prefix) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
54. ECC can be inserted / extracted to/from VC-4 POH Byte NC
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via other
operator's SDH network)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
55. F2 Byte can be inserted / extracted ▇▇▇ ▇.▇▇ Interface NC
(Application: for transparent transmission of ECC via
bridge and other operator's SDH network)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 O & M INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56. 8 x Remote Control Inputs C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
57. Remote Control Outputs C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
58. Card LED support C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
59. Subrack LED support (with RAA - C) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60. Rack Alarm support C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
61. Performance History Data Collection (ES, SES and UAT) ... C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62. at any MST - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63. at any RST - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64. at any VC-4 TTP C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65. at any VC-3 TTP C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
66. at any VC-12 TTP C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
67. at any AU-4 CTP - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
68. at any VC-3 CTP - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
69. at any VC-12 CTP - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70. for any AU-4 Tandem Connection - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71. for any TU-3 Tandem Connection - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
72. for any TU-12 Tandem Connection - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
73. from remote TTPs based on ▇▇▇▇ evaluation - ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
74. Threshold Crossing Notification C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 DETECTED ANOMALIES, DEFECTS AND CONSEQUENT ACTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75. Detection of Transmit Fail on any optical STM-N interface NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
76. Detection of Laser Shutdown on any optical interface C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77. Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
78. Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical
interface C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
79. Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
80. Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
81. Detection of OOF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
82. Detection of LOF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
83. Insertion of AIS upon persisting LOF detection C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
84. Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity
calculation C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.3 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
85. Detection of MS-AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
86. Insertion of all 1 upon detection of MS-AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
87. Detection of Signal Degrade C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
88. Detection of MS-EBER (10E-3) upon B2 BIP-24 parity error
calculation C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
89. Insertion of AIS and FERF upon detection of MS-AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
90. Detection of FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
91. Insertion of MS-▇▇▇▇ based on detection of B2 parity
calculations NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.4 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION ADAPTATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
92. Detection of AU-LOP C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
93. Detection of AU-AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
94. Detection of Number of AU-Pointer Justification Events NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95. Insertion of AU-AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.5 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
96. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
97. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
98. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
99. Detection of HP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100. Detection of HP-FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101. Detection of B3- EBER (10E-3) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.6 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
104. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105. Detection of LP-SLM NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
106. Detection of LP-FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
107. Detection of EBER C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.7 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
108. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
109. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111. Detection of LP-SLM NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112. Detection of LP-FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
113. Detection of EBER C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.8 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
114. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
116. Detection of HP-Trace Invalid C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
117. Detection of HP-▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
118. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
119. Detection of HP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of HP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
121. Detection of HP-FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
122. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.9 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
123. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
124. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
126. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
127. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
128. Detection of LP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
129. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130. Detection of LP-FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
131. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.10 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
132. Detection of Path AIS upon receive of all 1 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
133. Insertion of AIS and HP-FERF upon detection of Path AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
134. Detection of LP-Trace Invalid NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
135. Detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
136. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of ▇▇-▇▇▇ NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
137. Detection of LP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
138. Insertion of AIS and LP-FERF upon detection of LP-SLM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
139. Detection of LP-FERF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140. Detection of EBER (10E-3) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.11 ALL PLESIOCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
141. Detection of Trib.-AIS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
142. Detection of Trib.-LOS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
143. Detection of Trib.-LOF C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
144. Insertion of AIS upon detection of Trib.-AIS, Trib.-LOS, PC
Trib.-LOF ( With out Trib-LOF )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.12 SETS AND SETPI C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145. Detection of Sync. Source Fail C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
146. Detection of SETG - Hold C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
147. Detection of SETG - Out of Lock C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
148. Detection of SETG - Fail NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
149. Detection of Sync. Degrade NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150. Detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
151. T4 Squelch upon detection of Excessive Sync. Degrade NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
152. Detection of Sync. Source Threshold Crossing C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
153. Detection of Sync. LOS C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.13 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
154. Detection of Remote Control Input Active NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155. Detection of RS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
156. Detection of MS - Qecc Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.14 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
157. Detection of Secondary Power Fail NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
158. Detection of Primary Power Fail NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
159. Detection of Re-Boot Fail C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
160. Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
161. Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
162. Detection of Network Element Controller Fail NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163. Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
164. Detection of Card Out C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
165. Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity
mismatch C etc.)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
166. Detection of Wrong Card C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
167. Network Protection Switch Failure NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 STATUS EVENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
168. Configuration Data Integrity Fail C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
169. System Software Integrity Fail C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170. Laser Restart for Test C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator A/B active NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172. Synchronisation Source Quality Change NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
173. Synchronisation Source Switch Event C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
174. External Synchronisation Output Squelched NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
175. Section Layer Protection Switch Active NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176. Network Protection Switch Event NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177. Card Protection Switch Active NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
178. Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
179. Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180. Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
181. Access Log Capacity Exceeded NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
182. Software Download in Progress C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
183. Software Download Failure C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
184. Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
185. Software Download Complete C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
186. Card Restoration Complete C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
187. Re-Boot Restoration Complete C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
188. Electronic Label Update ? C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 ALARM EVENT HANDLING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
189. Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms) NC
(with Rel. 5 - C)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190. Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of C
consequent alarms)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
191. Alarm Inversion Facility C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
192. Performance of the alarm throughput greater than 10 alarms per second C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
193. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic PC
relevant alarm per port (Part of alarms)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
194. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic NC
relevant alarm group per card
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
195. It is possible to block/unblock each single traffic PC
relevant alarm group per NE (Part of alarms)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
196. Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per NC
functional unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
197. Upload of Configuration Data - on single command C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
198. Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
199. Download of Configuration Data - on bulk command NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.1 ALL SYNCHRONOUS OPTICAL INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200. Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
201. Enable / Disable Laser C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
202. Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.2 ALL MULTIPLEX SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
203. Set Threshold Signal Degrade C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
204. Set Threshold B2-EBER NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.3 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
205. Set Threshold B1-EBER NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.4 ALL HIGH ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
206. Set Threshold B3-EBER C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
207. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
208. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of
HP-▇▇▇ (per C Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
209. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of
HP-SLM (per C Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
210. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
211. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.5 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-3) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
212. Set Threshold EBER C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
213. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
214. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of NC
▇▇-▇▇▇ (per Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
215. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of NC
LP-SLM (per Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
216. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
217. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.6 ALL LOW ORDER PATH TERMINATION POINTS (VC-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
218. Set Threshold EBER C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
219. Set Threshold ▇▇-▇▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of NC
▇▇-▇▇▇ (per Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
221. Enable / Disable consequent actions from detection of NC
LP-SLM (per Path)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
222. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
223. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.7 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
224. Set Threshold B3-EBER C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
225. Set Threshold HP-▇▇▇▇ C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
226. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
227. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.8 ALL LOW ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
228. Set Threshold EBER NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
229. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
231. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2.9 ALL HIGH ORDER CONNECTION SUPERVISION POINTS (TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
232. Set Threshold EBER NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
233. Set Threshold ▇▇▇▇ NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
234. Set expected Signal Label (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
235. Set expected Path Trace (per Path) NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 NETWORK PROTECTION - ?
WHAT IT IS? IF NETWORK PROTECTION MEANS PATH PROTECTION SO
ALL CHAPTER 8 SHOULD BE - C.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 HIGHER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
236. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (AU-AIS, AU-LOP) NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
237. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 100ms NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
238. Configurable Hold-Off Time NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
239. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
240. Manual Switching via Management Interface NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
241. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-3)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
242. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
243. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
244. Configurable Hold-Off Time NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
245. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
246. Manual Switching via Management Interface NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
247. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 LOWER ORDER SUB-NETWORK CONNECTION PROTECTION (SNC/I, TU-12)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
248. Detection Criterion Signal Fail (TU-AIS, TU-LOP) NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
249. Switch-Over Completion Time less than 300ms NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250. Configurable Hold-Off Time NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
251. Enable / Disable Automatic Switching NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
252. Manual Switching via Management Interface NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
253. Configurable Wait Time to Restore NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
254. Event buffer C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
255. Heart Beat Function NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
256. Re-boot function C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
257. Real time clock function C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
258. NSAP Address modification NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
259. Local Software Download C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
260. Remote Software Download C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
261. Manager Decision Process for equipment access control C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
262. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPT C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
263. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPT C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
264. Display of VC-4 Path Trace at HPOM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
265. Display of VC-4 Signal Label at HPOM C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
266. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
267. Display of VC-3 Signal Label at LPT C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
268. Display of ▇▇-▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
269. Display of VC-3 Signal Label at LPOM NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
270. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
271. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPT C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
272. Display of ▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
273. Display of VC-12 Signal Label at LPOM NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
274. Display of Optical Transmit Power Level NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 LOGS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
275. Alarm / Status Log C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
276. Performance Log C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
277. Configuration Log C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
278. Access Control Log C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.3 REDUNDANCY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
279. 1:N Tributary Card Protection 2 Mbit/s NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
280. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 34 Mbit/s NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
281. 1:N or 1+1 Tributary Card Protection 45 Mbit/s NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
282. 1:N or 1+1 (electrical) Tributary Card Protection STM-1 NC
G.703 NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
283. 1+1 Protection of Clock System NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
284. Duration less than 5s for card protection automatic switch over NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
285. Integrity Check of Configuration Data C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
286. Integrity Check of System Software C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
287. Configuration of Loop Back on port level on all PDH
Interface Cards C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
288. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on STM-1 el. i/f C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
289. VC-4 level Configuration of Loop Back on all STM-4 opt.
Interfaces NA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical SDH NA
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
291. VC-3 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH C
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
292. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all electrical NA
SDH Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
293. VC-12 level Configuration of Loop Back on all optical SDH C
Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
294. Configuration of Loop Back on the HPC functional block NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
295. Configuration of Loop Back on the LPC functional block NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
296. Test Access Interface on all electrical interfaces C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
297. Test Access Interface on all optical interfaces NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
298. Optical Line Testing NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.5 INVENTORY DATA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
299. Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
300. Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade ? NC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
301. Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
302. Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
303. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
304. Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the NC
Management System
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
305. Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS 300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
306. Compliance with EN 55022 class B C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
307. Compliance with EN 50082 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
308. Compliance with EN 60950 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
309. Compliance with IEC 825-1 and IEC 825-2 C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
310. Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
311. wall mountable version C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
312. system upgrade or modification can be done without rear access C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 POWER SUPPLY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
313. Nominal input voltage -48V THE TN-1C MAY ALSO BE OPERATED C
BY AN EXTERNAL MAINS POWER SUPPLY UNIT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
314. Minimum accepted input voltage C
-20V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
315. Maximum accepted input voltage C
-72V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 AVAILABILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
316. The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional unit of IR IR IR
the offered equipment based on his statistical evaluations
according to the template as attached in Annex 1
SEE ANNEX 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 POWER CONSUMPTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
317. The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption figures for IR IR IR
each functional unit of the offered equipment according to the
template as attached in Annex 1
SEE ANNEX 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 SYSTEM MANUALS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
318. System Description in Hypertext Format on CD
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
319. System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 REFERENCES
2.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CECC ▇▇ ▇▇▇-▇▇ ▇▇/95 Detail Specification: Connector sets for optical fibres and cables Type
LSH-HRL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy /SDH) equipment functional
blocks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.813 1996 Timing Characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.825 1993 The control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on
synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International
constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Messverfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereiche sowie
Kleinbetriebe
02/96 Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit -
Teil 2: Industriebereich
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIN 47295 HF-Steckverbindung 1,6/5,6: Wellenwiderstand 75 Ohm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 ANNEX 1 - UNIT MTBF FIGURES AND POWER CONSUMPTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT NAME/TYPE UNIT ID UNIT FIT MAXIMUM POWER
FIGURE CONSUMPTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 Optical Mux (8x2) PIU 1310nm SH NTFT02AA 10144 24 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34/45 Mbit/s (VC-3) Tributary PIU NTFT31AA 667 3.4 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8x2 Tributary PIU NTFT08AA 2968 5 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 Optical Mux (8x2) PIU 1310nm SH NTFT02BA 7955 20 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 Optical Mux (8x2) PIU 1310nm LH NTFT02BB 7955 20 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STM-1 Optical Mux (8x2) PIU 1550nm LH NTFT02BC 7955 20 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2x 34/45 Mbit/s (VC-3) Tributary PIU NTFT31AB 2453 4.5 W
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SYSTEM FEATURE DESCRIPTION ELEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
----------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-RFX-0012
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
----------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzlanung
FILENAME System Feature Description Element Management System-10
----------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document lists the requested features of an
Element Manager for SDH systems DWDM systems or both.
----------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
----------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
API Applications Programmer Interface
BER Bit Error Ratio
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
c fully compliant
CM Configuration Management
CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds
CV Code Violation
DCN Data Communication Network
DMA Deferred Maintenance Alarm
EB Errored Block
EBER Excessive Bit Error Rate
EFD Event Forwarding Discriminator
EMS Element Management System
ES Errored Second
ESD Electro-static Discharge
EMC Electro-magnetic Compatibility
▇▇▇▇ Fare End Block Error
FERF Far End Receive Failure
FM Fault Management
GNE Gateway Network Element
GUI Graphical User Interface
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation
LAN Local Area Network
LMT Local Maintenance Terminal
MCF Message Communications Function
MIB Management Information Base
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
NE Network Element
NMC Network Management Centre
NMS Network (Layer) Management System
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OSS Operation Support System
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PM Performance Management
PMA Prompt Maintenance Alarm
PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
QoS Quality of Service
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SNC Subnetwork Connection
SSMB Synchronisation Status Message Byte
TMP Total (Performance) Measurement Period
TP Termination Points
TTP Trail Termination Point
UAS Unavailable Second
UT Unavailable Time
VC Virtual Container
WAN Wide Area Network
2 REQUESTED FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 MANAGED NE TYPES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS supports the offered SDH NE functionality and as C C C
stated to be available via compliance statement to the
network element requirements specifications.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS supports the offered DWDM NE functionality and as C C C
stated to be available via compliance statement to the
network element requirements specifications.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS is based on a standard commercially available C C C
operating system.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS hardware is a standard commercially available system C C C
with non modified external interfaces.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The parallel usage of additional standard application C C C
software is possible.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A failure in the EMS is in no case service affecting. C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The downtime of the EMS is less than four hours per month. C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS is a multi-user system. C C C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS can be operated by at least three operators on C C C
different terminals simultaneously.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. It is possible to apply EMS hardware redundancy on all C C C
critical components which might have impact on the EMS
availability.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 NORTHBOUND INTERFACE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. It is planned to interface the EMS to other vendor's network IR IR IR OSI
administration tools. The supplier shall specify the type of
available northbound interface.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. It is possible to retrieve all configuration data by an C C C
external CORBA client.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. It is possible to retrieve all equipment and transmission C C C
alarm data by an external CORBA client.
------------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ---------
4. It is possible to retrieve all Quality of Service Data by an C C C
external CORBA client.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. It is possible to retrieve all Service Management data by an C C C
external C C C CORBA client.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The supplier commits to supply the following information to
the northbound interface:
o Description of the applied communication protocols per each
layer
o Description of the message encoding rules
o Description of the Info Model
o Description of the DB table names
o Description of the DB table entries
o Description on how the information is coded
o Description on the DB triggers
o Description on the DB functions
o Description on the DB procedures
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 USER INTERFACE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1 GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The system supports a centralised online alarm viewer NC NC NC 1
allowing to centrally monitor equipment alarms at a single
screen, even if more than one element manager is required
for managing the network.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to transfer displayed information to a clipboard. NC NC NC 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The GUI is based on high resolution colour graphics, 1280 x 1024. NC NC NC 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. It is possible to connect at least three monitors to one EMS NC NC NC 1
user station.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The three monitors of the EMS user station can be configured NC NC NC 1
to display as one logical sceen.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. All EMS functionality stated as compliant in this document is C C C
available at the GUI.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS provides a facility to tailor the display in order to C C C
give maximum flexibility in presenting information to
the operator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. The GUI is capable of immediately displaying updates in case NC NC NC 2
of MIB changes.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. In case of display update on operator request, changes in NC NC NC 2
the MIB are indicated to the operator.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. It is possible to enter all GUI commands by using the mouse and NC NC NC 1
alternatively by using the keyboard.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. The EMS allows the entering of all characters of the German NC NC NC 1
icharacter set ncluding a,o,u etc.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12. The EMS supports a German keyboard. NC NC NC 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13. Dialogue boxes are used to confirm operator actions which may C C V
probably affect network traffic.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14. The EMS provides a facility to select objects and actions C C C
applicable to these objects.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. The EMS provides a facility to modify applicable object C C C
attributes in parameter windows.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. The execution of all long term operations is indicated to the C C C
operator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. End of execution of operations are immediately indicated to C C C
the operator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 NE REPRESENTATION ON THE GUI
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides at least three layers of NE object representation: NC NC NC 3
(a) Network map layer showing the subordinate NE objects on a
geographic map.
(b) NE equipment layer showing the equipment of a NE object
in its full depth (subrack, module, card, ...)
(c) NE transmission layer showing the transmission
information of a NE object (TPs, port configuration, cross
connection ...)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Layer (a), (b), (c) are concurrently available in different NC NC NC 3
windows at the GUI.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. In the network map layer, the NE objects are depicted as NC NC NC 3
icons on a geographical map.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The layout with the NE objects and its connections on the NC NC NC 3
geographic map can be stored by the operator in his operator
environment.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS provides a facility to modify the graphical NC NC NC 3
representation map with the help of a network editor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The GUI supports the operator for the configuration of C C C
cross-connections between traffic termination points.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The NE equipment layer shows structure and properties of the NC NC NC 3
equipment being part of a NE including at least subracks,
modules and cards of the NE.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. NE pictures resemble the physical equipment and layout. NC NC NC 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. The GUI supports navigation between layers in a comfortable way. NC NC NC 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS user administration provides facilities to create, C C C
delete and modify operators and their access rights.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS logs all operator sessions including log in and C C C
log out operation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS provides a facility to generate a print out of any C C C
information stored within the EMS (e.g. alarm logs,
screen prints etc.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS provides a facility for a comfortable print management C C C
(cancel print jobs, select printer, ...)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS supports at least 3 user classes, configurable by the C C C
administrator
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.4 NE STATUS PRESENTATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. NE status changes (such as operational state or alarm state) C C C
are displayed by means of clearly visible and audible
signals).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. It is possible to disable audible signals. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The change of the administrative state of a certain object C C C
leads to according state modifications of subordinate
objects in the EMS management information base (MIB) and
vice versa, wherever reasonable.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.5 TEXTUAL REPRESENTATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a textual representation of all information C C C
in its MIB.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The textual representation is a formatted list of MIB C C C
contents (e.g. logs, object attributes).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The operator is able to choose between different levels of C C C
detail in the textual representation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS provides scope and filter mechanisms to customise list C C C
representations.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The information is presented in a scrollable list. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.6 HELP SYSTEM
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a context sensitive on-line help system for C C C
each window and (sub) menu
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The help system is extensible by the operator. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Under normal operating conditions, the worst case C C C
duration for ....
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. ... Creation of a NE is below 10 minutes C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. ... System Software download to a NE is 10 minutes C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. ... Configuration data download to a NE is below 10 minutes C C C
(Please state the maximum duration of a traffic restoration
process).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. ... Data consistency check with a NE is 1 minute C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. ... NE Reboot is below 5 minutes C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. ... Upload of single configuration data is within 1 minute C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. ... Configuration of a single cross connection within a NE C C C
is 1 second.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. ... Acceptance of a command entered at the user interface C C C
is 2 seconds.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. ... Notifying a traffic affecting failure upon detection C C C
at the NE is 2.5 seconds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Under normal operating conditions, the maximum number of C C C
events forwarded to the EMS is not limited.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11. The supplier shall state the maximum number of manageable IR IR IR EC1:128,
network elements (per NE type). OPC:24
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 CORE FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.1 SUPPORT OF NE FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS supports all NE Traffic Interface related configuration C C C
commandsas listed in the NE specification and committed to be
available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS supports all NE Connectivity related configuration C C C
commands as listed in the NE specification and committed to
be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS supports all Network Protection Switching related C C C
configuration commands as listed in the NE specification and
committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS supports all NE Synchronisation related configuration C C C
commands as listed in the NE specification and committed to
be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS supports all NE Management Interfaces related C C C
configuration commands as listed in the NE specification
and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS supports all General Configuration commands as listed C C C
in the NE specification and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS supports all Fault Management related configuration C C C
commands as listed in the NE specification and committed to
be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. The EMS supports all Performance Management related C C C
configuration commands as listed in the NE specification and
committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. The EMS supports all O&M related configuration commands as C C C
listed in the NE specification and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.2 EQUIPMENT CREATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to add NE objects to the EMS database. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to use default attribute values for new C C C
equipment, unless specified or changed by the operator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS allows to set equipment attributes before creation is C C C
performed: Internal ID, Official ID, name, information
to objects (such as address, customer ID or other
supplementary information deemed to be helpful for the
maintenance process)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS allows to assign a unique user friendly name to each NE. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS allows to create NEs, regardless of whether physical C C C
equipment exists.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS allows to create a new equipment object by using templates C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS performs attributes value consistency checks before C C C
creation is performed.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. The EMS reports errors to the operator, at least unsuccessful C C C
operations and invalid attribute values.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. The EMS automatically creates all termination point objects C C C
during NE creation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. The EMS can create a list of all NEs which are managed by the EMS. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.3 TRANSMISSION CONFIGURATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a graphical view showing HO connection NC NC NC 4
termination points.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS provides a graphical view showing cross-connections NC NC NC 4
configured within in the NE.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS provides a lists of termination points sorted acc. C C C
identifier order and operational state.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS provides lists of cross-connections sorted acc. and C C C
identifier order and operational state.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS allows to configure the object representation by C C C
means of selection criteria (operational state, identifier
order).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS allows to configure cross connections in lists. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS allows to configure cross connections in graphical view. NC NC NC 4
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. The EMS allows to download pre-defined MIB for traffic NC NC NC 5
restoration purposes (please state the quantity of restoration
configurations that can be predefined and stored in
parallel).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. The EMS allows to download by bulk command all MIB parts NC NC NC 5
which need to be downloaded for restoration purposes.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. The EMS allows to download by bulk command selected MIB NC NC NC 5
parts (e.g. cross connections).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.4 ALARM CONFIGURATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to set alarm severity PMA, DMA and MEI NC NC NC 6
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to set alarm severity to active and inactive NC NC NC 6
alarms.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS allows to set the severity of an alarm per ... NC NC NC 6
... single type of alarm.
... single NE instance (port, card,...).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS allows to set the criteria for activating the audible C C C
alarm indication (e.g. alarm priority).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS allows to set the alarm on-line printing. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS allows to set alarm masking of any alarm. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The masking of an active alarm does not cause inconsistencies C C C
between the list of current alarms and the alarm log.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.5 EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to set equipment attributes name, information C C C
to objects (such as address, customer ID or other
supplementary information deemed to be helpful for the
maintenance process).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to insert multiple equipment attribute changes C C C
before performing these modifications.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS checks attributes values prior to performing the C C C
modification.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. It is possible but not mandatory that attribute modifications C C C
which will have impact on existing service are to be
confirmed by the operator prior to performing the
modification.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1.6 EQUIPMENT DELETION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to delete NE objects in the EMS database. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to delete NE objects in the EMS database C C C
without impact on the carried traffic.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. NE object deletion needs to be confirmed by the operator. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. If a resource is physically removed, the corresponding C C C
equipment object shall is not automatically deleted in
the EMS database.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.1 SUPPORT OF NE FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS supports all NE Traffic Interface related alarms as C C C
listed in the NE specification and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS supports all Network Protection Switching related C C C
alarms and status information as listed in the NE specification
and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS supports all Synchronisation related alarms and C C C
status information as listed in the NE specification
and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS supports all Management Communication related alarms C C C
and status information as listed in the NE specification and
committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS supports all Fault and Status Management features as C C C
listed in the NE specification and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS supports all Performance Management related alarms C C C
and status messages as listed in the NE specification and
committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS supports all O&M related alarms and status messages C C C
as listed in the NE specification and committed to be
available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. The EMS supports all Power Supply related alarms as listed C C C
in the NE specification and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.2 ALARM AND STATUS INFORMATION RECEIVING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS is capable of retrieving all not yet received alarms C C C
after loss of communication between EMS and NE (especially
after system shutdown).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.3 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a facility to acknowledge alarms. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. When alarm acknowledgement is performed, acknowledgement C C C
information shall be stored by the EMS with at least:
a) user ID of acknowledging operator,
b) date and time of acknowledgement,
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. It is possible to clearly identify the alarm status C C C
"acknowledged" in the alarm log
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS shall provide a facility to acknowledge one or more C C C
alarms simultaneously, e.g. multiple selection in alarm
lists.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.4 ALARM LOGGING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides alarm logs. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS stores all alarms in alarm logs. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS has access and can show contents of alarm logs C C C
created by the NEs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS alarm log is capable of storing at least 50 000 entries. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS alarm log size is configurable. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS informs the operator before the log capacity limit is C C C
reached.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS allows to print out the content of the alarm log. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. The EMS alarm log contains the C C C
o the correlated alarm counter number
o alarm ID number,
o alarm name,
o correlated object (s),
o date and time of alarm raise time
o date and time of alarm clear time,
o alarm severity,
o date and time of acknowledgment.
o the correlated alarms
o the deletion and filtering state
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5 ALARM PRESENTATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5.1 Alarm Presentation Format
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS presents active and acknowledged alarms in textual format. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS presents active alarms in graphical format. NC NC NC 7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS provides an audible alarm indication in case of a C C C
received alarm event.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS displays a counter of the active and acknowledged alarms. NC NC NC 7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS displays a counter per each severity class. NC NC NC 7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5.2 List of Active and Acknowledged Alarms
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a facility to show active alarms. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS provides a facility to configure the alarm presentation C C C
presentation to be updated on command.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS provides a facility to configure the alarm presentation C C C
to be updated automatically.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS displays the C C C
o alarm ID number,
o alarm name,
o correlated object,
o date and time of alarm status change,
o severity, and the
o acknowledgement status.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS allows to print the List of active and acknowledged alarms. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5.3 Detailed Alarm Information
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to detect the cause of an alarm by locating the alarm NC NC NC 8
source in the graphical NE presentation (subrack, modules and cards).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5.4 Alarm Filtering and Masking
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a facility which masks the consequent alarms from the NC NC NC 9
primary alarm.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS provides a low pass filter allowing to constantly activate a NC NC NC 9
toggling alarm status.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5.5 List of Logged Alarms
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS creates alarm lists out of the selected alarm logs. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS creates lists of selected attributes out of the several C C C
alarm logs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS creates lists of selected attributes values out of NC NC NC 10
the several alarm logs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS allows to store and to retrieve all types of alarm C C C
lists on external storage devices.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS allows to print the list of logged alarms. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.5.6 Heart Beat Function
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS is capable of monitoring the connection to the subordinate C C C
NEs periodically.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS generates an alarm if the communication to the NE fails. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The EMS regularly sends its status to the NMS in order to C C C
detect a communication failure or EMS failure.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3.1 PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS supports Performance Management related features as C C C
listed in the NE specification and committed to be available.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to configure performance measurement on command. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS automatically receives performance history data at C C C
the end of a measurement period.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS allows to store all performance history data in a C C C
performance log.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS allows to store at least 30 x 24 h and 100 x 15h C C C
minutes performance per each single performance
monitoring point of the NE.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The performance history data are identified by NE id, NE type C C C
and NE port and configurable name.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3.2 PERFORMANCE HISTORY PRESENTATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to present the current and reloaded performance C C C
history logs in table format
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to present the current and reloaded performance NC NC NC 11
history logs in a diagram.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS allows to print out the current and reloaded C C C
performance history logs in table format.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS allows to export the current and reloaded performance NC NC NC 11
history logs in ASCII or EXCEL data format.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 EMS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.1 USER ACCESS CONTROL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to define different operator classes for supporting C C C
functional operation and maintenance domain partitioning.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The definition of operator domains is restricted to the system C C C
administrator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS provides an application to administer EMS operators, C C C
their access rights and the definition of a NE domain.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A User ID / Password combination shall be available to get C C C
access to the EMS applications.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS locks an operator log in after a configurable number of C C C
unsuccessful attempts.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The EMS unlocks locked operator accounts either manually by C C C
the system administrator or automatically by the system
after a configurable amount of time.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The EMS can lock the screen. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.2 LMT ACCESS CONTROL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Log in to a NE by a LMT is indicated to the EMS by a notification C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Log out from a NE by a LMT is indicated to the EMS by a notification. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The equipment avoids access conflicts and possible consequent C C C
data inconsistencies due to parallel EMS and LMT access to
the NE by password protection.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.3 DATA MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.3.1 Data Base
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS MIB is completely stored in the data base. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS provides a MIB browser. NC NC NC 12
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A database transaction log is maintained NC NC NC 12
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The data base transaction log contains at least the following NC NC NC 12
information:
o Date and time when the operation was performed
o Operator ID
o data base operation
o Object on which operation was performed
o NE ID to which object belongs
o success/fail transaction
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS provides an open interface to ist data base (e.g. SQL) C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.3.2 Data Backup
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The operator interface of the archiving utilities is user NC NC NC 13
friendly (e.g. no sequence of operating system commands
is required).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS allows to manually backup and restore the complete C C C
management data of the EMS.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS allows to automatically backup and restore the C C C
complete management data of the EMS (excluding the data
dictionary).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS provides a facility to log backup operations. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The archive media is delectable. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. The backup operation does not influence system operations. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. The result of the archiving operations is reported to the EMS C C C
operator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.3.3 System Upgrade
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. In case of an EMS software update including a change of the C C C
configuration data model, it is possible to extract all EMS
configuration data, to perform any conversion required for
the new software and to repopulate the database.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. An EMS software update does not affect the interfaces in any case. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS logs data base errors in any case. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.3.4 Data Consistency between EMS and NEs
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS allows to check the EMS configuration data and the C C C
data of all subordinate NEs (audit function).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Upon the data consistency audit, the EMS allows both upload / C C C
download of configuration data from / to the NE.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS monitors the data consistency regularly. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS alarms in case of detected H/W to data base inconsistency. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.4 EMS SYSTEM SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.4.1 EMS System Software Download
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS software applications can be downloaded as single C C C
packages with version number.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Each EMS software application has its own version number. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Error-free transfer of system software download is ensured by C C C
verification procedures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. The EMS software update does not have any influence on the C C C
network traffic.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The EMS shall provide a facility to read the current EMS C C C
software version.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.4.2 EMS Restart
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS restart procedure performs data consistency checks C C C
between the EMS and the configuration data of all
subordinate NEs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS restart does not have any effects on the network traffic. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.4.3 EMS Shutdown
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS provides a facility to shut down the system without C C C
restarting it automatically (e.g. not removable database
integrity errors, viral infections).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The EMS reports the start of an EMS shutdown to the NMS. NC NC NC 14
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The EMS shutdown does not have any effects on the network traffic. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.4.4 EMS Recovery
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The EMS contains an EMS recovery mechanism to control all C C C
concurrently running processes within the EMS (e.g. restart
of an application process).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. If any persisting problems are discovered by the EMS, the C C C
recovery procedure performs appropriate actions (e.g.
inform the operator etc.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The recovery process is not traffic affecting. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The Equipment allows error free operation in accordance with C C C
ETSI Rec. C C C prETS 300 019-2-3, Class T 3.1.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The Equipment is compliant with the standards EN 55022 and C C C
EN 50082, class B
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Equipment is marked with the CE-compatibility sign. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NO. ITEM SOC SOC SOC REF. NO.
T1 T2 T3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 SAFETY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. The Equipment meets the electrical safety requirements of EN 41003. C C C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. The equipment is designed to ensure operation without hazard C C C
to personnel due to electrical commotion
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 REFERENCES
3.1 REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD STATUS DATE TITLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 04/91 Physical/Electrical characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ digital hierarchy bit rates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.782 1994 Types and general characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇-▇ ▇.▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ of synchronous digital hierarchy /SDH) equipment
functional blocks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.826 11/93 Error performance parameters and objectives for International constant
Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.841 1995 Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.957 1993 Optical Interfaces and Systems relating to the synchronous digital
hierarchy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 019 pr 02/92 Environmental conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications
Equipment
Part A: Introduction and Terminology
Part B: classification of Environmental conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 119 European Telecommunication Standard for Equipment Practice
03/93 Part 2: Engineering Requirements for Racks
09/93 Part 3: Engineering Requirements for Miscellaneous Racks and cabinets
09/93 Part 4: Engineering Requirements for Subracks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETS 300 253 01/95 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in telecommunication
centres
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 41003 1991 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunication network
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 55022 05/95 Grenzwerte und Me(beta)verfahren fur Funkstorungen von Einrichtungen der
Informationstechnik
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EN 50082 Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm Storfestigkeit
12/94 Part 1: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm
Storfestigkeit - Teil 1: Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereiche
02 /96 sowie Kleinbetriebe
Part 2: Elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit - Fachgrundnorm
Storfestigkeit - Teil 2: Industriebereich
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 2
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 4.1
Item No.: 8,9
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Graphical User Interface for EMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The EC-1 and the OPC do not save information in MIBs as this means is part of
the SNMP standard. However all configuration information is stored in the
resilient network elements and the databases contained in those Multiplexers as
the only valid database originating from the assumption that only the network is
the real database for configuration information. Uploads and Downloads of
configuration information to INM via the element controllers is feasable.
Uploaded information is stored in a database at the Element Control level which
the INM system is accessing on request to perform the desired changes from the
pathmanagement system itself. The responsible application is the INM
Trailmanager.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 3
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 4.2
Item No.: 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NE Representation on the GUI
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 4
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.1.3
Item No.: 1,2,7
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Transmission Configuration
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 5
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.1.3
Item No.: 8,9,10
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Transmission Configuration
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 2.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 6
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.1.4
Item No.: 1,2,3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm Configuration
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The severity of an alarm is provided as part of the Network Element generated
fault messages and cannot be changed by the means of using the Element
Controller, as the severity assigned is based on the experience Nortel Networks
has gained through customers during the long period of time since SDH
multiplexers have been available.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 7
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.1.5.1
Item No.: 2,4,5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm Presentation Format
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 8
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.1.5.3
Item No.: 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detailed Alarm Information
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 9
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.1.5.4
Item No.: 1,2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm Filtering and Masking
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 14
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 7.4.4.3
Item No.: 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EMS Shutdown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In case of an EMS shutdown the upper layer INM system recognises the loss of
communication and reports this failure. In the case of redundant EMS systems the
spare EMS takes over management operation and ensures continued network
management operation.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 10
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.2.5.5
Item No.: 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
List of logged Alarms
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 11
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 6.3.2
Item No.: 2,4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Performance History Presentation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 12
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 7.4.3.1
Item No.: 2,3,4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data Base
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
EXPLANATORY SHEET (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supplier: NORTEL DASA Reference No.: 13
otel.o Document No.: ST-rfx-0012
Chapter: 7.4.3.2
Item No.: 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Item of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data Backup
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Description of non compliance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please refer to note 2.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Proposed further Development:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ / Compliant development planned until / / T1 / / T2 / / after T2
/X/ Further Development planned but not compliant with o.tel.o requirements
/ / No further development
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Affect of further Product Development on the o.tel.o Network
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 TRANSMISSION FEATURES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 The supplier provides a link/hop planning tool allowing to recommend Nortel
simulate and design the DWDM network (Attenuation, Network Engineering
Dispersion,..). OPTICAL POWER
BUDGET TOOL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 The supplier provides a released document containing system IR IR IR see Doc. 323-1251-
planning and engineering rules based on standard single 233 SEC. 8 -Optical
mode fibres. Link Engineering
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 TRANSMISSION INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Connector Type E2000 APC see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 3.2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1 INTERFACES ACCYING N x LAMBDAS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Maximum output power of the interfaces IR IR IR see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 1.3 -
Wavelength Plan and
SEC.1.4 - Client
Interfaces
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 OADM link/hop limits (attenuation, dispersion,..) as function IR IR IR see Doc. ▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇-▇▇▇
of number and lengths of hops between terminals. SEC. 8 Optical Link
Engineering
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Automatic output power adjustment depending on the number see OPTera Product
of received channels Description SEC 7.2.2 -
Performance Management
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 N x lambda interface on tributary side see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 1.3 -
Wavelength Plan and
SEC.1.4 - Client
Interfaces
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.2 TRANSPONDERS AND TRIBUTARY INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Optical interface I-16.1 see TN-64X Tech. Spec.
▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇-▇▇▇
SEC. 2 - Optical
Interface
Specification
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Optical interface S-16.1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Optical interface L-16.1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Optical interface L-16.2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Bitrate independent interface see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 4.2 -
Optical Channel Card
and SEC.4.3 - Optical
Channel Interface
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Optical Power Budget without transponders IR IR IR see Nortel Network
Engineering OPTICAL
POWER BUDGET TOOL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Active wavelength control (not only via chip temperature)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Transmit transponders optional for tributary channels
(option to use output signals from coloured transmitters
without need to implement transponders)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Receive transponders optional for add/drop channels (option
to apply DEMUX output signal to SDH-receiver)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY Wavelengths are organised
into bands each band
having four wavelength
based on 200GHz SPACING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 In case of optical channel spacing 100 GHz: see OPTera Product
Description SEC.1.3 -
Wavelength Plan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Max. number of optical channels aggregate east to agg. west IR IR IR (see OPTera Product
Description SEC.1.3 -
Wavelength Plan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Min. number of optical channels aggregate west to agg. east IR IR IR (see OPTera Product
Description SEC.1.3 -
Wavelength Plan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Max. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from IR IR IR see OPTera Product
direction east Description SEC. 2 -
Network
Configurations
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Min. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from IR IR IR see OPTera Product
direction east Description SEC. 2 -
Network
Configurations
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Max. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from IR IR IR see OPTera Product
direction west Description SEC. 2 -
Network
Configurations
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Min. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from IR IR IR see OPTera Product
direction west Description SEC. 2 -
Network
Configurations
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IN CASE OF OPTICAL CHANNEL SPACING 50 GHz:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Max. number of optical channels aggregate east to agg. west IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 Min. number of optical channels aggregate west to agg. east IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 Max. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from direction east IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 Min. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from direction east IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 Max. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from direction west IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 Min. number of optical channels added/dropped to/from direction west IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 STM-64 COMPATIBILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 It is possible to upgrade aggregate - aggregate channels from see OPTera Product
STM-16 to STM-64 without need to change hardware. Description SEC. 4.2 -
Optical Channel
Laser and Detector
Card
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 It is possible to upgrade specific aggregate - tributary see OPTera Product
channels from STM-16 to STM-64 is possible without Description SEC. 4.1 -
affecting other channels. Optical Multiplexer
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.4 OTHER TRANSMISSION FEATURES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Dispersion compensation for aggregate - aggregate channels see Doc. ▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇-▇▇▇
SEC. 8 Optical
Link Engineering
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Automatic gain control
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 A aggregate - aggregate channel upgrade is not traffic
affecting to all channels already in service
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 A aggregate - tributary channel upgrade is not traffic
affecting to all channels already in service
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Forward error correction
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE see Nortel
SPEAKEASY EOW
Overview Document
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 INTERFACES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 wire i/f (towards PSTN)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 2 wire i/f (towards standard handset)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 FUNCTIONS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Selective Call
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Conference Call (up to four participants)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 5.2.3 -
Standard
Communications
Interfaces and SEC.7.3 -
Management
Communication
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 F- Interface (RS 232)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Q- interface as gateway to the EMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Qecc Routing (2 level IS-IS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Q I/F (Ethernet)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Optical Supervisory Channel
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 OSC - wavelength IR IR IR see OPTera Product
- bitrate Description SEC. 5.2.2
- optical span limit - Per Wavelength
- transmission protocol Optical Service
Channel and SEC.7.3 -
Management
Communication
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 O & M INTERFACES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 8 x Remote Control Inputs
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Remote Control Outputs
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Card LED support
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Subrack LED support
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Rack Alarm support
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 7.2.2
- Performance
Management
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 B1 Performance Monitoring on Transponder Unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 15 min Performance History Data Collection from each
Regenerator Section Monitoring Point (ES, SES and UAT).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 24 h Performance History Data Collection from each
Regenerator Section Monitoring Point (ES, SES and UAT).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 15 min Performance History Log for more than 100 intervals
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 24 h Performance History Log for more than 30 intervals
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Performance Monitoring Threshold Crossing Notification
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 FAULT AND STATUS MANAGEMENT see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 7.2.3
- Fault Management
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 4.2 -
Optical Channel
Card; SEC.4.3 -
Optical Channel
Interface; SEC.4.4 -
Optical Channel
Manager AND SEC.4.5 -
Shelf Processor
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Laser Restart for Test
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Detection of Laser Shutdown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Detection of disabled ALS on any optical interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Detection of Optical Source Power High on any optical interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Detection of LOS, LOS status change hysteresis
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Insertion of AIS upon detection of LOS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Detection of number of received channels
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Monitoring of laser current for pump laser 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Monitoring of laser current for pump laser 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 Monitoring of temperature for pump laser 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 Monitoring of temperature for pump laser 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 Monitoring of laser temperature
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 Monitoring of transmitted wavelength
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 Monitoring of received input power
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 Monitoring of transmitted output power
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 Detection of coupler temperature high
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 Detection of grating temperature high
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 5.5.-
Maintenance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Detection of OOF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Detection of LOF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity
calculation on demux unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Detection of ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ (10E-3) based on B1 BIP-8 parity
calculation on transponder unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Detection of Section Trace Mismatch based on J0 Byte
monitoring on demux unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Detection of Section Trace Mismatch based on J0 Byte
monitoring on transponder unit
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.3 MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 7.3.-
Management
Communications
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of Remote Control Input Active
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detection of OSC Comms Fail (LAPD Alarm)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.4 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT FUNCTION see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 7.2.-
System Management
and SEC.5 - Software
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Detection of Secondary Power Fail
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Detection of Primary Power Low
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Detection of Primary Power Fail per each single power feed
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Detection of Re-Boot Fail
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Detection of Configuration Data Integrity Check Failure
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Detection of System Software Integrity Check Failure
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Detection of Network Element Controller Fail
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Detection of Card Protection Switch Failure
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Detection of Card Out
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 Detection of Card Fail (upon detection of internal parity mismatch etc.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 Detection of Wrong Card
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 Network Protection Switch Failure
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 Optical Layer Protection Switch Active
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 Card Protection Switch Active
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 Fault / Status Log Capacity Exceeded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 Configuration Data Transaction Log Capacity Exceeded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 Performance Monitoring Log Capacity Exceeded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18 Access Log Capacity Exceeded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19 Software Download in Progress
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 Software Download Failure
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21 Software Download Failure - Retry in Progress
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22 Software Download Complete
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23 Card Restoration Complete
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24 Re-Boot Restoration Complete
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25 Electronic Label Update
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 ALARM EVENT HANDLING see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 7.2.3
- Fault Management
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Alarm Persistence Filter (filtering of toggling alarms)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Alarm Correlation Filter (F3 filter, suppression of consequent
alarms)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Alarm Inversion Facility
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Performance of the alarm throughput GREATER THAN 10 alarms per second
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Indication of Alarm Event Forwarding Suppression per
functional unit (e.g. Regenerator Section ...)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 7.2.1
- Configuration
Management and
SEC.5.4 -
Configuration
Management
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 GENERAL see OPTera Product
Description SEC.5 -
Software Description and
SEC. 7.2.- System
Management
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Upload of Configuration Data - on single command
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Upload of Configuration Data - on bulk command
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Download of Configuration Data on bulk command
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 CONFIGURATION OF FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.1 ALL OPTICAL INTERFACES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Set of transmitted output power
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Set of input power warning thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Set input power switch off thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Set output power warning thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Set output power switch off thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Set laser current alarm thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Set of laser temperature alarm thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Set of transmitted wavelength alarm thresholds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Enable / Disable Automatic Laser Shutdown according to ITU-T G.958
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 Enable / Disable Laser
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 Enable Laser for Test Purposes (2s / 90s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2.2 ALL REGENERATOR SECTION MONITORING POINTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Set Threshold B1-EBER
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 NETWORK PROTECTION see OPTera Product
Description SEC. 5.6 -
Protection Switching
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1 OPTICAL MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION (OMSP)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 OMSP function
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Switch-Over Completion Time (LESS THAN) 50ms
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Enable / Disable Automatic Switching
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Manual Switching via Management Interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Configurable Wait Time to Restore
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.2 WAVELENGTH SELECTIVE PROTECTION SWITCHING
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Wavelength selective Subnetwork Connection Protection
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Switch-Over Completion Time (LESS THAN) 50ms
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Enable / Disable Automatic Switching
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Manual Switching via Management Interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Configurable Wait Time to Restore
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1 GENERAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Event buffer
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Heart Beat Function for all processes
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Automatic Re-boot after power failure
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Real time clock function
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Automatic synchronization of NE real time clock on EMS real time clock
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 It is possible to set the NE time and date via EMS/LCT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 NSAP Address modification
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Local Software Download
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Remote Software Download
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 Upload of configuration data to EMS/LCT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 Download of configuration data from EMS/LCT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 Manager Decision Process for equipment access control
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 Display of Optical Transmit Power Level
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2 LOGS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Alarm / Status Log
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Performance Log (storage capacity at least 8 x 15 min
intervals and 30 x 24 h interval for each monitoring point)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Configuration Log (storage capacity at least 24 h)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Access Control Log (storage capacity at least 10 days)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 REDUNDANCY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Dual Power Feed
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 1+1 Protection of Power Supply
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Redundancy of pump lasers
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING FUNCTIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Integrity Check of Configuration Data
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Integrity Check of System Software
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Configuration of Loop Back on all optical Interface Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Optical monitoring port on each transmit transponder (output
signal)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Optical monitoring port on each receive transponder (input
signal)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Optical monitoring port on each pre-amplifier (input signal)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Optical monitoring port on each booster-amplifier (output
signal)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.5 INVENTORY DATA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Electronic Label Read Access via Management Interfaces
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Automatic Electronic Label Upgrade
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Compatibility Check of Equipment Hardware Releases
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Compatibility Check of Equipment Firmware Releases
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Compatibility Check of Equipment Software Releases to the
Management System
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 Electronic Label contents:
- Unit hardware release / version
- Unit hardware serial number
- Unit firmware release / version -
- Unit software release / version
- Unit installation date of unit/NE -
- Production date of unit/NE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY
AND SAFETY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Compliance with Stationary Use Conditions acc. to prETS
300 019-2-3 Class T 3.2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 No need for air conditioning via elevated ground floor
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Compliance with EN 55022
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Compliance with EN 50082
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.3 SAFETY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 CE certification available
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Electrical safety according to EN 41003
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 General requirements according to EN 60950 A1, A2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Fire and heat safety according to ETS 300 019-2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CCG RFQ-ST-rfx-0005-OPTICAL ADM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: see o.Tel.o RFI Part 4 for detailed responses to similar questions.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional information is available in the documents identified in the Comment colum)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PARA T1 T2 T3 COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 300 mm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Rack size according to ETSI 300 119, 600 mm x 600 mm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 System installation and h/w upgrade via front access possible
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 Number of required Racks in minimum configuration IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Number of required Racks in maximum configuration IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 POWER SUPPLY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Nominal input voltage -48V
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Minimum accepted input voltage IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 Maximum accepted input voltage IR IR IR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 AVAILABILITY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 The supplier shall provide MTBF figures for each functional IR IR IR
unit of the offered equipment based on his statistical
evaluations according to the template as attached in Annex 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 POWER CONSUMPTION
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 The supplier shall provide worst case power consumption IR IR IR
figures for each functional unit of the offered equipment
according to the tem-plate as attached in Annex 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 SYSTEM MANUALS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 System Description in Hypertext Format on CD
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 System O&M Manuals in Hypertext Format on CD
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPECIFICATION OF SERVICES
ID ST-rfx-0015
REVISION 1.3 / APPROVED
DATE 06 Sep 1999
CONFIDENCE CCG CONFIDENTIAL
------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systemtechnik ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Netzbetrieb
NOTICE Netzplanung
FILENAME Specification of Services-13
------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION Attachment to the contract with supplier of DWDM and
SDH equipment defining all regular and optional
services offered by the supplier in conjunction with
type acceptance, installation, commissioning and
operation of the systems.
------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
1.1 / APPROVED / 12/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇, comments from
Netzaufbau inserted
1.2 / APPROVED / 27/08/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇, Delivery Times
and Field Acceptance wording, project
interfaces adapted
1.3 / APPROVED / 06/09/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇, Nortel Dasa
Project Interface Chart inserted
------------------------------------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Scope....................................................................4
2 Definitions and Abbreviations............................................5
2.1 Definitions...........................................................5
2.2 Abbreviations.........................................................6
3 Project Management.......................................................7
3.1 Project Management Manual.............................................7
3.2 Contract Plan.........................................................7
3.3 Reporting.............................................................7
3.3.1 Product Creation Report..........................................7
3.3.2 Project Implementation Report....................................7
3.4 Assigned Key Persons..................................................7
3.5 Project Meetings......................................................9
3.5.1 Project Review Meetings..........................................9
3.5.2 Project Implementation Review Meetings...........................9
3.5.3 Commercial Meeting..............................................10
3.5.4 Technical Review Meetings.......................................10
4 Type Acceptance.........................................................11
4.1 General..............................................................11
4.2 Type Acceptance Procedure............................................11
4.2.1 Type Acceptance Documentation...................................11
4.2.2 Acceptance Test in Test Floor...................................14
4.2.3 Acceptance on First Site........................................14
4.2.4 Handling of Deficiencies........................................15
4.3 Type Acceptance Certificate..........................................16
4.4 Type Acceptance Fail.................................................16
4.5 Type Modifications...................................................16
5 Regular Services........................................................17
5.1 Ordering.............................................................17
5.2 Delivery Times.......................................................17
5.2.1 Without Forecast................................................17
5.2.2 With Forecast...................................................17
5.3 Goods Installation...................................................18
5.3.1 General.........................................................18
5.3.2 Site Survey.....................................................18
5.3.3 Preparation of Site.............................................18
5.3.4 System Installation.............................................18
5.3.5 Installation Documentation......................................19
5.3.6 Commissioning...................................................19
5.4 Field Acceptance.....................................................19
5.4.1 General.........................................................19
5.4.2 Field Acceptance Documentation..................................20
5.4.3 Field Acceptance Certificate....................................20
5.4.4 Field Acceptance Fail...........................................20
5.5 Training.............................................................20
5.5.1 General.........................................................20
5.5.2 Network Operation...............................................20
5.5.3 System Administration and Maintenance...........................21
6 Maintenance Services....................................................22
6.1 General..............................................................22
6.1.1 Classification of Problems......................................22
6.1.2 Problem Reporting...............................................23
6.2 Help Desk Services...................................................23
6.3 Replacement Service..................................................24
6.3.1 General.........................................................24
6.3.2 Replacement Procedure...........................................24
6.3.3 12 hours Replacement Service....................................24
6.3.4 24 hours Replacement Service....................................24
6.4 Corrective Maintenance Service.......................................24
6.4.1 General.........................................................24
6.4.2 Time to Repair..................................................25
6.5 Onsite NMC-Support...................................................25
6.6 De-Installation......................................................25
7 Quality Assurance.......................................................26
7.1 Project Management System............................................26
7.2 Quality Plan.........................................................26
7.3 Quality Audits.......................................................26
7.4 Fault History System.................................................26
8 Time Schedules..........................................................27
8.1 Type Acceptance......................................................27
8.1.1 Type Acceptance Preparation.....................................27
8.1.2 Type Acceptance Testing.........................................29
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
SCOPE
This document specifies all regular and optional services offered by the
supplier in connection with the installation, commissioning and operation of SDH
and DWDM systems.
All services described herein are deemed to be regular services unless
explicitly stated otherwise in this document.
This document is an attachment to the main part of the contract between CCG and
its supplier for SDH-systems. The services described herein are relating to all
systems and components ordered by CCG in the frame of this contract unless
explicitly stated otherwise in this document. 2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
3 DEFINITINS AND ABBREVIATIONS
3.1 DEFINITIONS
Acceptance Acceptance shall mean a written declaration
that a particular portion of the Seller's
work has been successfully completed.
Date of Contract Date of Contract shall mean the date the
Contract is executed.
Installation Installation shall mean materials, labour,
testing and anything else necessary to be
provided or undertaken by the Seller under
the Contract to enable the System to be
installed Ready for Acceptance.
Network Element A Network Element shall mean any multiplexer,
cross connect or repeater.
Product Creation Product Creation shall mean the process of
product specification and development
including the Seller's System test.
Quality Plan Quality Plan shall mean the document setting
out specific quality practices, resources and
sequence of activities relevant to the
tendered goods and services in accordance
with ISO 9001.
Type Type shall mean a set of Network Elements or
a Network Management System based on the same
set of hardware, firmware, software and
documentation. A Type is described by the
corresponding Type Acceptance handbook.
Type Modification Type Modification shall mean any modification
of a Type after Type Acceptance as requested
by the Seller by change request and agreed by
CCG.
1.
2. Ready for Type Acceptance Ready for Type
Acceptance shall mean the date at which all
tasks have been finalised to start Type
Acceptance Testing in the test floor.
3.
4. Regression Testing Regression Testing shall
mean testing of the correct functionality of
a selected range of the features of a
previous Type included in the new Type.
5.
6. Site Site shall mean land, buildings and
environment where the System shall be
installed.
7.
8. Site Ready for Acceptance Site Ready for
Acceptance shall mean the date on which all
tasks have been finalised by the Seller so
that Field Acceptance Testing can commence.
9.
10. Site Ready for Installation Site Ready for
Installation shall mean that CCG has
finalised all work on Site so that
implementation can commence.
11.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS
BAPT Bundesamt fur Post und Telekommunikation
BZT Bundesamt fur Zulassung in der Telekommunikation
DC Deficiencies Cleared
EMS Element Management System
FA Field Acceptance
FAC Field Acceptance Certificate
FAT Field Acceptance Test
IMS Integrated Management System
LMT Local Maintenance Terminal
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
NE Network Element
SFD System Feature Description
SS Site Survey
SSA Site Survey Announcement
SRI Site Ready for Installation
SRIA Site Ready for Installation Announcement
SRA Site Ready for Acceptance
SRAA Site Ready for Acceptance Announcement
t Working Day
TA Type Acceptance
TAC Type Acceptance Certificate
TRA Type Ready for Acceptance
TRFR Type Ready for Rollout
w 5 working days
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT MANUAL
1. The Seller shall submit a Project Management Manual containing details on
the management structure, procedures to be followed for planning, monitoring
and reporting of any kind of work from the Seller.
4.2 CONTRACT PLAN
1. The Seller shall provide a contract plan. The Seller and CCG shall agree on
the contract plan which describes the work breakdown structure identifying
and relating hierarchically all technical and management work packages
required to perform the scope of work defined in the contract and detailing
responsibilities, all time frames and interfaces for all services specified
in this document.
2. The contract plan shall relate the work packages to a milestone plan.
4.3 REPORTING
4.3.1 PRODUCT CREATION REPORT
2. The product creation reports shall be prepared on a quarterly basis. The
product creation reports shall reach CCG the first Monday of the quarter.
4.3.2 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION REPORT
1. The Seller shall prepare Project Implementation Reports comprising all
project progress information. The project implementation report shall
- show delivery dates per Site and any anticipated delivery delays,
- clearly work out all non performance of the Seller by providing
statements to each single milestone
- provide decision proposals for solving actual and potential future
problems.
2. The Seller shall issue the project implementation reports on a bi-weekly
basis. The project implementation reports shall reach CCG Mondays.
3. The Seller shall provide CCG with invoice and payment summaries in agreed
format on a monthly basis.
4.4 ASSIGNED KEY PERSONS
1. The Seller shall nominate a senior management representative who shall have
the authority to commit any resource necessary to ensure timely performance
of the work in accordance with the contract, regardless of the part of the
company's organisation in which the resource is deployed.
2. The Seller shall nominate one project implementation manager who shall be
the primary contact person between the Seller and CCG. The project manager
shall have the responsibility for resolution of all issues arising from the
contract, including commercial, ordering and manufacture issues, System
engineering, installation, commissioning, project and product documentation,
progress reporting, training, maintenance, repair and quality assurance.
3. The Seller shall nominate a reasonable number of regional engineers
reporting to the Seller's project implementation manager. The regional
engineers shall support the project manager for handling all
regional affairs of System engineering, installation, commissioning, project
and product documentation, project reporting, maintenance, repair and
quality assurance.
4. The Seller shall appoint a technical manager with overall responsibility for
all technical features of any offered product.
5. The Seller shall appoint a commercial manager as contact person for CCG's
finance/controlling department. The commercial manager shall be responsible
for handling all main pricing and penalty issues.
4.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
[GRAPHIC]
FIGURE 1: PROJECT MEETINGS
4.5.1 PROJECT REVIEW MEETINGS
1. The meeting shall address commercial, technical and project implementation
related issues of general interest.
2. The project review meeting shall be held on regular intervals as required by
CCG.
3. The project review meeting shall be attended by the authorities responsible
for technical issues and by project implementation managers of both parties.
4. The project review meeting shall be chaired by the CCG heading project
manager.
5. The minutes of the review meeting shall be recorded by the Seller and
distributed when CCG has agreed on the content within 3 days.
4.5.2 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION REVIEW MEETINGS
1. The meeting shall address the progress of the Seller in performing the
activities identified in the contract plan.
2. The project implementation review meetings shall be held at reasonable
regular intervals as required by CCG.
3. The project review meeting shall be attended by the project implementation
managers of both parties.
4. The meeting shall be chaired by the CCG project implementation manager.
5. Not later than one week in advance of the project implementation review
meeting the Seller shall submit in writing to the CCG project implementation
manager the project report to identify the work progress.
6. The minutes of the review meeting shall be recorded by the Seller and
distributed when CCG has agreed on the content within 3 days
4.5.3 COMMERCIAL MEETING
1. The meeting shall address all main issues concerning pricing, penalties and
invoicing.
2. The commercial meetings shall be held as required by CCG.
3. The commercial meeting shall be attended by the commercial managers of both
parties.
4. The meeting shall be chaired by the CCG commercial manager.
5. The minutes of the commercial meeting shall be recorded by the Seller and
distributed when CCG has agreed on the content within 3 days.
4.5.4 TECHNICAL REVIEW MEETINGS
4.5.4.1 PRODUCT STATUS MEETING
1. The product status meeting shall address the progress of all product
technical issues up to the product Type Acceptance.
2. The product status meetings shall be held at reasonable regular intervals as
required by CCG, typically on a monthly basis.
3. The product status meeting shall be attended by the technical managers of
both parties.
4. The meeting shall be chaired by the CCG technical manager.
5. The minutes of the meeting shall be recorded by the Seller and distributed
when CCG has agreed on the content within 3 days.
3.5.4.2 TYPE ACCEPTANCE REVIEW MEETING
1. The meeting shall address all Type Acceptance related technical issues.
2. Type Acceptance review meetings shall be held at reasonable regular
intervals as required by CCG during the entire Type Acceptance process.
3. The Seller shall name one Type Acceptance project leader as key contact
person for handling all Type Acceptance related issues during all Type
Acceptance phases. He shall carry out all official correspondence concerning
the Type Acceptance.
4. The Seller shall name an appropriate number of experts who shall accompany
all phases of the Type Acceptance process.
5. The Type Acceptance review meeting shall be attended by the Seller's Type
Acceptance project leader, the Seller's experts accompanying the Type
Acceptance procedure and the relevant CCG staff involved in the Type
Acceptance.
6. The meeting shall be chaired by the CCG authority responsible for Type
Acceptance.
7. The minutes of the Type Acceptance review meeting shall be recorded by the
Seller and distributed when CCG has agreed on the content within 3 days.
6 TYPE ACCEPTANCE
Please note that this specification may not apply at full extend for the
initial implementation project. 4.1 GENERAL
1. The Seller shall verify together with CCG the functionality of the offered
Type
- prior to first implementation in CCG Network, or
- if changes in form, fit and function have been made.
2. The Type Acceptance test shall include but not be restricted to the following
test areas:
- completeness with respect to the Type documentation,
- correctness of Network Element upgrade documentation,
- regression tests,
- new functionality with respect to the previous Type,
- interworking with previous Types,
- compatibility to other accepted Network Element Types,
- conformance to CCG specifications, standards which the relevant CCG
specifications refer to, and other general standards deemed to be
mandatory by CCG.
4. The Seller shall provide best support for the preparation of Type Acceptance.
5. The Seller shall accompany the Acceptance Test and show that the product
development and production has been conducted according to agreed
specifications and requirements.
6.2 TYPE ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
6.2.1 TYPE ACCEPTANCE DOCUMENTATION
[GRAPHIC]
FIGURE 2: TYPE DOCUMENTATION OVERVIEW
6.2.1.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION
1. The Seller shall provide the information listed in this paragraph not later
than 6 months prior to Ready For Type Acceptance. For the initial type
acceptance the Seller shall provide the information right after signing the
Contract.
6.2.1.1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1. The Seller shall provide a detailed system description of the type under
test.
2. The Seller shall provide a complete system operation & maintenance handbook
for the Type under test.
3. The Seller shall provide a complete network operation handbook of the type
under test.
6.2.1.1.2 FEATURE LIST
1. The Seller shall provide a list of all new features of the Type under test
with respect to a previous Type.
2. The Seller shall provide a list of all enhancements of the Type under test.
Reference shall be made if the enhancement corresponds to an item on a
deficiency list of a previous Type.
6.2.1.1.3 SYSTEM TEST SPECIFICATION
1. The Seller shall send to CCG his released System test specification for the
Type under test.
6.2.1.1.4 LIST OF COMMITTED MISSING FEATURES
1. The Seller shall provide a list of missing features which have been
committed for the Type under test.
6.2.1.1.5 SYSTEM UPGRADE INFORMATION
1. The Seller shall provide detailed information on the procedure to upgrade
previous releases to the Type under test.
6.2.1.2 DETAILED DOCUMENTATION
1. The Seller shall provide his information listed in this paragraph not later
than 30 days prior to Ready for Type Acceptance.
6.2.1.2.1 TYPE ACCEPTANCE TEST SPECIFICATION
1. CCG will prepare a list of requirements which shall be performed as part of
the Type Acceptance test. The Seller agrees that the Type Acceptance tests
will be performed on the basis of this Type Acceptance test specification.
2. CCG will finalise the preparation of the Type Acceptance test specification
for the relevant Type not later than 10 weeks prior to Ready For Type
Acceptance.
3. The Seller shall check the Type Acceptance specification and shall agree on
it prior to preparation of the Type Acceptance Test procedures.
2.1.2.2 SPECIFICATION OF TYPE ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES
1. The Seller shall provide a specification of test procedures based on the
Type Acceptance test specification of CCG. Such procedures shall also list
the expected test results in detail.
2. The Seller shall provide a draft Specification of Type Acceptance test
Procedures not later than four weeks after having received the Type
Acceptance Test Specification from CCG.
3. If CCG finds tests to be insufficient the Type Acceptance test specification
will be amended by CCG. The Seller shall prepare corresponding test
procedures and shall agree those with CCG prior to the planned commencement
of Acceptance testing.
6.2.1.2.3 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST SPECIFICATION
1. CCG will prepare a list of requirements which shall be performed as part of
the Field Acceptance test. The Seller agrees that the Field Acceptance tests
will be performed on basis of this Field Acceptance test specification.
2. CCG will finalise the preparation of the Field Acceptance test specification
for the relevant Type not later than 10 weeks prior to Ready For Type
Acceptance.
3. The Seller shall check the Field Acceptance test specification and shall
agree on it prior to preparation of the specification of test procedures.
4.2.1.2.4 SPECIFICATION OF FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES
1. The Seller shall provide a specification of Field Acceptance test procedures
based on the test specification of CCG. Such procedures shall also list the
expected test results in detail.
2. The Seller shall provide a draft Specification of Field Acceptance test
procedures not later than four weeks after having received the Field
Acceptance test specification from CCG.
3. If CCG finds tests to be insufficient the Field Acceptance test
specification will be amended by CCG. The Seller shall prepare corresponding
test procedures and shall agree those with CCG prior to the planned
commencement of field Acceptance testing.
6.2.1.2.5 DEFICIENCY LIST
1. The Seller shall provide sufficient information about:
- missing features to fully comply with the functionality committed
for the Type under test,
- all detected new or still existing bugs and deficiencies,
- any additional bugs or inconsistencies found during Type Acceptance
shall amend the deficiency list,
- any features deemed to require modification shall amend the
deficiency list.
6.2.1.2.6 LIST OF BUILD LEVELS
1. Prior to the start of Type Acceptance test the Seller shall provide complete
documentation of the compatible hardware, firmware and software build level
providing the full set of features of the relevant Type under test.
6.2.1.2.7 LIST OF EXEMPTIONS
1. A list of exemptions shall be agreed between Seller and CCG.
2. The list of exemptions shall contain those items which cannot be tested at
the time of Type Acceptance test execution.
3. The exemptions list shall be part of the Type Acceptance handbook.
4. The Type Acceptance does not apply to features listed on the exemptions list.
5. Type Acceptance test of items on the exemptions list will be executed as
soon as the test becomes feasible.
6.2.1.3 TYPE ACCEPTANCE HANDBOOK
1. The Seller shall be responsible for compiling the Type Acceptance handbook.
2. The content shall be approved by signature of the Seller and CCG after
having passed the Type Acceptance testing.
3. The Type Acceptance handbook shall include but shall not be restricted to:
- the signed agreement to the Type Acceptance handbook from the Seller and
CCG,
- a reference to a corresponding feature list,
- a reference to the functional System description,
- a reference to the System upgrade information (where applicable),
- the list of build levels,
- the list of exemptions,
- the specification of Type Acceptance test procedures and its summary,
- the field Acceptance test specification and its summary,
- the specification of field Acceptance test procedures and its summary,
- the Acceptance test protocols,
- the list of non-blocking deficiencies,
- the Network Operation Handbook
- the System Description
- the System Operation & Maintenance Handbook
6.2.2 ACCEPTANCE TEST IN TEST FLOOR
1. The Type Acceptance test shall be performed in the Seller's test floor, or
if required by CCG, in CCG's test floor.
2. The Seller shall provide the system test configuration as specified by CCG.
3. The Seller shall provide all necessary tools and test equipment for carrying
out the Type Acceptance Tests.
4. The test environment, the system test configuration, the tools and test
equipment shall be consistent with what has been specified by CCG.
5. The test environment, the system test configuration, the tools and test
equipment shall be fixed in the specification of test procedures.
6. All results of the Type Acceptance tests shall be recorded in a Type
Acceptance test protocol.
6.2.3 ACCEPTANCE ON FIRST SITE
1. The Acceptance on first site shall be handled as part of the Type Acceptance
procedure. It may be conducted on an implemented subnetwork under controlled
operational conditions.
2. The Acceptance test on first Site shall be conducted for testing the
- interworking with CCG network.
- error free System operation during a certain observation period.
3. The Seller shall provide all necessary tools and test equipment.
4. The test environment and measurement equipment shall be fixed in the
specification of test procedures.
5. Unless required otherwise by CCG, the Acceptance test on First Site shall
not start before the Type Acceptance in test floor has been passed and clear
criteria for deficiencies detected in the test floor phase of Type
Acceptance have been defined.
6. The Acceptance on first site shall include an evaluation phase to define
clear criteria of deficiencies for certification of Acceptance.
7. Type Acceptance will only be certified when all clear criteria for
certification of Field Acceptance on first site have been fulfilled.
8. During Acceptance test on first site an Acceptance test protocol shall be
prepared.
6.2.4 HANDLING OF DEFICIENCIES
1. All deficiencies detected during the type acceptance test will be documented
by CCG in its own problem report handling tool (PRDB).
2. CCG will assign classes to each deficiency listed in the PRDB. The assigned
priorities will be agreed between the Seller and CCG. In case of
disagreement the assigned priority by CCG shall prevail.
3. The Seller shall document its statements and activities as to the deficiency
clearing in the PRDB. For this purpose gets access to the PRDB.
4. The Seller shall keep CCG informed of all deficiency clearing activities via
the PRDB until the deficiencies are removed.
6.2.4.1 DEFICIENCY CLASSES
6.2.4.1.1 BLOCKING DEFICIENCIES (CLASS 1)
1. Class 1 deficiencies shall be those which results in a degradation or loss
of transmission services.
2. Class 1 deficiencies shall block the Type Acceptance. Removal of Class 1
deficiencies shall be prerequisite to start Field Acceptance testing on 1st
site.
3. For Class 1 deficiencies written response time shall be 5 days.
4. For Class 1 deficiencies removal shall happen within 10 days.
6.2.4.1.2 CRITICAL DEFICIENCIES (CLASS 2)
1. Class 2 deficiencies shall be those which results in a severe degradation or
loss of the manageability of the Type under test.
2. Class 2 deficiencies shall block the Type Acceptance upon decision of CCG.
Removal of blocking Class 2 Deficiencies shall be prerequisite to start
Field Acceptance testing.
3. For Class 2 deficiencies written response time shall be 10 days.
4. For Class 2 deficiencies removal shall happen within 20 days.
6.2.4.1.3 MAJOR DEFICIENCIES (CLASS 3)
1. Class 3 deficiencies shall be those which are causing additional effort
concerning operation and maintenance for the Type under test.
2. Class 3 deficiencies shall not block the Type Acceptance.
3. For Class 3 deficiencies written response time shall be 20 days.
4. For Class 3 deficiencies removal shall happen within 60 days.
6.2.4.1.4 MINOR DEFICIENCY (CLASS 4)
1. Class 4 deficiencies shall be those which will have no impact neither on
services nor on operation and maintenance.
2. Class 4 deficiencies shall not block the Type Acceptance.
3. For Class 4 deficiencies written response time shall be 20 days.
4. For Class 4 deficiencies removal shall happen within the next CCG release.
6.3 TYPE ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE
1. The Type Acceptance tests shall be completed when the system type is
successfully implemented in the network and all acceptance blocking
deficiencies have been solved.
2. As soon as the Type Acceptance tests have been completed CCG will issue a
certificate of Type Acceptance (FAC) to the Seller.
6.4 TYPE ACCEPTANCE FAIL
1. If the Type Acceptance fails, the Seller shall forthwith implement free of
charge alterations or modifications to the work as it is necessary to repeat
the final acceptance as soon as the deficiencies are removed.
6.5 TYPE MODIFICATIONS
1. After the initial Type Acceptance the Seller shall send for any modification
of a system component (i.e. changes in the HW- or SW-status) a type
modification request to CCG.
2. The type modification request shall include:
o description of the reason for modification, impacted units and
components,
o description of the modification, impacted units and components,
o a cross reference to CCG's problem reports (if any),
o implementation instructions.
3. If the type modification request reveals any risk of changes in form, fit or
function the Type Acceptance of the respective unit type shall be partly or
completely repeated on request of CCG.
4. CCG will officially release the modified unit type for its network not later
than 6 months after the receipt of the respective type modification request
provided that the repetition of the Type Acceptance (if requested by CCG)
has been successful.
5.
7
8 REGULAR SERVICES
8.1 ORDERING
1. The Seller shall provide the means to order systems on unit level without
detailed knowledge of the system design and system configuration rules.
2. CCG will send to the Seller for each site a binding purchase order including
purchase order number plus a Requisition Data Sheet containing all necessary
information for initiating the System delivery and installation process at
the Seller.
3. CCG will provide all necessary information to enable the Seller to review
the capability of the System planned to be ordered. The Seller shall review
the information immediately. The Seller shall then clarify inconsistencies
or ask for missing information within two days.
4. In the Requisition Data Sheet CCG will state the requested date of Ready for
Acceptance (RfA). CCG may prolong this date up to a time of 6 months. If
this period elapse the ordered Hardware and Software will be delivered and
invoiced to CCG. Respective services such as installation will not be
invoiced.
5. CCG may want to modify Requisition Data Sheets during the ordering phase.
The Seller and CCG will handle such modifictions on a case by case basis.
Each modification has to be confirmed by an official purchase order.
8.2 DELIVERY TIMES
1. Delivery time is the time from order received by the Seller to the
successful completion of the respective Field Acceptance test or - in case
of deliveries only - to the date of completed delivery to CCG's site.
2. For orders placed after 09/1999, the figures mentioned under para. 5.2 shall
be considered as target figures, matter of mutual agreement between the
seller and CCG.
8.2.1 WITHOUT FORECAST
1. For those parts of orders exceeding the volumes states in the current
forecast the Seller guarantees delivery times as stated in the table below.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ORDER TYPE LEAD TIME
----------------------------------------------------------
FROM ORDER RECEIPT FOR FIELD ACCEPTANCE FOR COMPLETE
TO READY FOR TEST DELIVERY
ACCEPTANCE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
complete system 8 weeks 1-3 weeks 9-11 weeks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
plug-in-units 2 weeks 1 week 3 weeks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2.2 WITH FORECAST
1. For those parts of the orders that are within the volumes stated in the
current forecast the Seller guarantees delivery times as stated in the table
below.
2. The forecast shall be a non-binding rolling forecast covering the period of
the following 6 months stating the expected order volumes for each calendar
month in the considered period. The forecast shall be updated on a monthly
basis. The volumes for the first 2 months stated in the updated forecast
shall not be changed against the corresponding volumes stated the previous
forecast.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ORDER TYPE LEAD TIME
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
FROM ORDER RECEIPT FOR FIELD ACCEPTANCE FOR COMPLETE
TO READY FOR TEST DELIVERY
ACCEPTANCE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
complete system 3 weeks 1-3 weeks 4-7 weeks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3 GOODS INSTALLATION
8.3.1 GENERAL
1. The Seller shall be responsible for keeping the System up to date until the
acceptance has been achieved.
2. CCG shall have the right to be present and shall be free to carry out
surveillance at all stages of delivery and installation.
3. The Seller shall supply all tools and test equipment for his use during
installation and commissioning.
8.3.2 SITE SURVEY
1. The Seller and CCG shall commonly attend the Site Survey.
2. The announcement for Site Survey shall be sent to the Seller not later than
one week prior to its execution.
3. During the site survey the Seller shall be obliged to identify all action
items to be done by CCG in order to allow CCG to fulfil his obligation for
reaching Site Ready For Installation. The Seller and CCG will agree on all
action items directly on Site.
8.3.3 PREPARATION OF SITE
1. CCG will be responsible for preparing the Site.
2. The site shall not deemed ,,Ready for Installation" unless the following
prerequisites are fulfilled by CCG:
- power supply available
- grounding points available
- connection plan plan
- DCN-connections available
- floorplan available
- access to the site for installation, commissioning and acceptance
test purposes during normal working hours and - if agreed with
CCG - at other times.
- contact person from CCG available for clarification of details as
to site access and installation.
- completion of all civil works impacting installation and operation
of the systems.
3.
4. CCG shall declare ,,Site Ready for Installation" (SRI) not later than 2
weeks before required ,,Ready for Acceptance" (RfA) date. In case the
announcement ,,Ready for Installation" is delayed by CCG the RFA date will
be postponed accordingly.
8.3.4 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. The Seller shall be responsible for properly installing all Systems
delivered by the Seller. This includes neccessary cabling to network
interfaces and distribution frames, earthing and interfacing to the power
feeds in the equipment room.
2. The Seller shall install the equipment according to the installation
guidelines as per contract document "Allgemeine Richtlinie zum Aufbau von
Prasenzlokationen", "Richtlinie zum Aufbau von Signalverteilern" und
"Richtlinie zu Kabellangen".
3. The Seller must be aware that work may be carried out on a non CCG Site. In
this case special conditions and standards may apply.
8.3.5 INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION
1. The Seller shall deliver full installation documentation as defined in the
document ,,Lieferumfang Aufbaudokumentation".
8.3.6 COMMISSIONING
8.3.6.1 GENERAL
1. The System commissioning shall be under full responsibility of the Seller.
2. Commissioning tests shall be carried out on all installed systems supplied
under the Contract.
3. All units installed for commissioning shall be of the latest relevant build
level accepted by CCG unless explicitly requested otherwise by CCG.
4. The Seller shall perform the commissioning of the systems on basis of his
own commissioning procedures. The Seller shall make this procedures
available for CCG as soon as the Contract is signed. On request of CCG the
Seller is obliged to amend or change the procedures.
5. Any modifications in the commissioning procedures have to be agreed by CCG.
8.3.6.2 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT FOR COMMISSIONING
1. The Seller shall be responsible for supply of tools and test equipment
necessary for his use during the commissioning phase.
2. The Seller shall list all tools and test equipment in all appropriate
commissioning specifications.
8.4 FIELD ACCEPTANCE
8.4.1 GENERAL
1. The Seller shall provide any support for preparation of and shall accompany
the Field Acceptance test to show that the integration into the CCG network
has been conducted according to agreed specifications and requirements.
2. The Type Acceptance shall be prerequisite for the Field Acceptance unless
otherwise requested by CCG. The initial network implementation phase in 1999
is regarded as exceptional case.
3. The Field Acceptance shall be carried out for each single Network Element.
The initial network implementation phase in 1999 will also focus on network
testing.
4. The Seller shall give notice to CCG 1 (one) week prior to Site Ready For
Acceptance.
5. The Field Acceptance test will be carried out within 1 (one) week after
Ready for Acceptance and if requested by CCG - may be extended by a
stability test period of up to two weeks duration. Exceptions may apply
during the initial network implementation phase in 1999.
6. All deficiencies detected during the Field Acceptance test shall be cleared
1 (one) week after start of Field Acceptance latest.
8.4.2 FIELD ACCEPTANCE DOCUMENTATION
8.4.2.1 FIELD ACCEPTANCE HANDBOOK
1. The Seller shall be responsible for compiling a Field Acceptance Handbook.
2. The Field Acceptance Handbook shall include but not be restricted to the
- Field Acceptance Certificate,
- detailed test procedures,
- field Acceptance test protocol.
8.4.3 FIELD ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE
1. The Field Acceptance tests shall be completed when the system is
successfully implemented in the network and all acceptance blocking
deficiencies have been solved.
2. After Field Acceptance is successfully completed, CCG will issue a Field
Acceptance Certificate to the Seller.
8.4.4 FIELD ACCEPTANCE FAIL
1. If the Field Acceptance fails the Seller shall forthwith implement free of
charge alterations or modifications to the work as it is necessary to repeat
the Field Acceptance test within 5 days of notification of the failure.
8.5 TRAINING
8.5.1 GENERAL
1. The Seller shall provide training courses for all his offered products.
2. The Seller shall provide training at the Seller's or CCG's premises. The
location for training will be chosen on a case by case basis by CCG.
3. The Seller shall have sufficient training capacity to fulfill the
requirements of CCG.
4. The Seller shall offer separate training courses for each offered system
family.
5. The lead time for booking of training does not exceed 4 weeks.
6. The Seller shall provide training documentation at least 2 weeks before
start of the training course.
7. The Seller shall agree with CCG the contents of the courses prior to its
beginning.
8. If required by CCG the Seller shall train third party personal on the
maintenance and/or operation of the Seller's systems.
8.5.2 NETWORK OPERATION
1. The Seller shall provide operator training seminars which shall put the
trained staff into the position to operate the transmission network based on
the Seller's products.
2. The training courses shall consist of a theoretical and a practical part.
The theoretical part shall provide essential theoretical technical
information of the System. The practical training shall cover all areas of
operation (configuration management, fault management, performance
management, accounting management, security management and system
administration). CCG staff shall be especially trained on emergency
procedures for specific fault situations.
3. The seller shall provide an appropriate test system configuration where the
practical part of the training can be carried out in a real-time
environment.
8.5.3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE
1. CCG will nominate Network Management System Administrators. These persons
shall be sufficiently trained for this function by attending appropriate
System administration training courses.
2. The System maintenance training provided for CCG staff shall enable CCG to
control maintenance services by the Seller and also to fulfill tasks that
are complementary to the maintenance services of the Seller.
9
10 MAINTENANCE SERVICES
This section specifies the optional maintenance support service parameters
required from the Seller.
10.1 GENERAL
1. The Seller shall be responsible for maintenance of all hardware and software
delivered by the Seller. On request of CCG the maintenance services may be
restricted to a certain part of the delivered hardware and software. The
part the maintenance services applies to is determined by CCG.
2. In case the Seller supplied goods of third parties, the Seller's maintenance
shall include services offered by the third party. In this case, the Seller
shall provide all necessary information on the installed hardware, firmware
and software in order to enable the third party to fulfill the maintenance
task in the same quality as the Seller.
3. The Seller shall be willing to optionally provide maintenance services for
other vendor's Systems.
4. The Seller shall be willing that maintenance services for his Systems are
optionally provided from other vendors.
5. The Seller shall provide information to his maintenance concept which shall
include but not be restricted to
- the proposed spare stock model taking into consideration equipment
reliability, equipment population and stock-out risk,
- the ratio of spare unit numbers exclusively stored,
- the number and experience of staff proposed to exclusively working
for CCG for maintenance purposes,
- the number of distributed maintenance centres,
- the procedure for cyclic spare part tests on central and
distributed spare stocks (benchmark tests),
- the type and number of test equipment required for maintenance
purposes,
- the logistic concept,
- his reporting system which includes all datas about Sellers network
elements used in other transmission networks (e.g. real MTBF,
failures reasons, measures to reduce failures),
- reference information about supplier's maintenance projects of
similar size.
6. CCG has the option to choose different Maintenance Services as described in
the sections 6.2, 6.3, 6.4 and 6.5.
10.1.1 CLASSIFICATION OF PROBLEMS
1. The classification of all problems shall be in accordance with the following
guide lines. The classification of an actual problem will be agreed between
the Seller and CCG. In case of disagreement the classification by CCG shall
prevail.
10.1.1.1 REAL-TIME EMERGENCY (A)
1. A Priority (A) problem shall be any hardware or software problem
- resulting in loss or degradation of service, or
- resulting in loss or degradation of the surveillance of the
network, or
- impacting the network security.
2.
10.1.1.2 REAL-TIME URGENT (B)
1. A Priority (B) problem shall be any hardware or software problem not
classified as (A)
- resulting in a loss or degradation of the managebility of the
network, or
- impacting the data integrity, or
- requiring real-time technical assistance.
10.1.1.3 REAL-TIME NON-URGENT (C)
1. A Priority (C) problem shall be any low level hardware, software or
documentation problem not classified as (A) or (B).
10.1.2 PROBLEM REPORTING
1. The Seller shall own and maintain problem reporting tools. CCG will get all
CCG specific information out of these tools.
2. Problems investigated under this service shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
- Defects in the System hardware and software.
- Anomalies where the product does not meet the contractually
specified performance,
- Anomalies where the operational reliability of the product has
fallen below the contractually agreed MTBF,
- Anomalies where the supplier has used a component or manufacturing
process which introduces systematic failure necessitating remedial
action,
- Problems caused by operations, maintenance, training or training
documentation,
3. The Seller shall analyse each incoming formal report to check whether the
contents are sufficient for an investigation to take place.
4. If the contents are insufficient, the Seller shall specify precisely what is
required and then refer to the originator within agreed time scales.
5. The Seller shall report progress on each formally reported operational
problem within agreed time scales.
6. The problem report shall be provided free of charge as long as the equipment
is in use by CCG.
10.2 HELP DESK SERVICES
1. The Seller shall provide a telephone support within 30 minutes after having
received the request for Help Desk Service.
2. The Seller shall provide a support service covering operational problems
which shall include, but not be limited to:
- General advice and guidance,
- Advice indicating possible causes of software or hardware problems
and if determined to be a known problem, whether a proven solution
exists.
- Advice on proven procedural solutions that can be followed to
alleviate the impact of a problem.
- Resolution of local problems that cannot be solved using standard
procedures.
- Enquiries associated with the progress of problems via problem
reporting tool.
3. The Help Desk Service includes a remote support service which guarantees
direct access to the network management system and is activated by CCG to
support the fault tracing. In this case the Seller is responsible for
restoring the service.
4. The Seller's support staff shall fully co-operate with any member of CCG
involved in an emergency incident.
5. The Seller shall provide the Help Desk Service 24h per day for
365 days a year.
10.3 REPLACEMENT SERVICE
10.3.1 GENERAL
1. The Replacement Service has to be provided 24 hours a day for 365 days a
year.
2. The replacement units must be fully compatible with the components they are
replacing.
3. Freight costs of the returning of the defective equipment to Seller shall be
borne by CCG. All other transportation costs shall be borne by Seller.
4. The Seller will charge repairs in case of misuse of equipment or
inappropriate alteration of the equipment on expense.
5. The Seller shall be responsible for all stock keeping of spare parts
necessary to obtain the required replacement times.
10.3.2 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. CCG will send a request for replacement equipment on an agreed document to
the Seller's repair centre.
2. The Seller shall acknowledge a repair service request by CCG as soon as
possible but not later than eight hours after having received the request by
fax.
3. CCG sends the defective module with a fault description to the Seller's
Repair Center as soon as possible but not later than five days after having
received the replacement equipment.
4. When sending the replacement equipment to CCG, the Seller shall provide an
accompanying document indicating:
- the serial number of the equipment being replaced as reported on
CCG's request for replacement,
- the serial number of the replacement equipment,
- the associated repair reference number
5. After receiving the defective module the Seller will provide a repair report
including sufficient information about the cause of the failure and
consequent actions in a reasonable time frame.
10.3.3 12 HOURS REPLACEMENT SERVICE
1. The replacement equipment must be received by CCG within a timeframe of 12
hours after request by CCG independent of the place of repair work.
2. CCG indicates on the request sheet whether this delivery shall be made
during its working hours or in the committed timeframe.
10.3.4 24 HOURS REPLACEMENT SERVICE
1. The replacement equipment must be received by CCG within a timeframe of 24
hours after request by CCG independent of the place of repair work.
2. CCG indicates on the request sheet whether this delivery shall be made
during its working hours or in the committed timeframe.
10.4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICE
10.4.1 GENERAL
1. Corrective Maintenance Service means in case of a fault all tasks to restore
the service and bring the system into the specified operational conditions.
The restoration can also be achieved by a temporary workaround until the
original fault is solved.
2. The Seller shall correct all anomalies, problems or defects resulting in an
operational problem.
3. The Corrective Maintenance Service has to be realized 24 hours a day for
365 days a year.
4. The replacement units must be fully compatible with the Machines or
components they are replacing.
5. Time to repair (TTR) is the elapsed time from the activation of Corrective
Maintenance Service at the Seller's helpdesk until the repair is
successfully completed. The activation of the Corrective Maintenance Service
shall be performed on a mutually agreed form.
6. The Seller shall be responsible for all stock keeping of spare parts
necessary to obtain the required repair times.
10.4.2 TIME TO REPAIR
1. Any problem resulting in an corrective maintenance action shall previously
classified according to Section 6.1.1, Classification of Problems.
2. For any problem class the Seller guarantees the TTR-figures as stated in the
table below.
3. For particular problems CCG may request a higher TTR than stated in the
table below. CCG shall state such requests in written form upon the
activation of the corrective maintenance.
------------------------------------------------------
Problem Class TTR
------------------------------------------------------
A 4 hours
------------------------------------------------------
B 12 hours
------------------------------------------------------
C 48 hours
------------------------------------------------------
10.5 ONSITE NMC-SUPPORT
1. The Seller shall provide an onsite support for the Network Management Center
(NMC) of CCG.
2. The onsite support shall comprise the following subjects:
o operation of the network elements from the management system
installed at the NMC,
o assistance and technical support for CCG's own operators,
o running online training courses on network management aspects, and
o development of CCG-specific operational emergency processes.
3. The Seller shall provide one person during the normal working hours (8h per
day, 5 days per week) exclusively for the onsite NMC-Support. This person
shall be a well-trained expert on the network elements and the network
management system and shall be capable to fulfill the tasks listed above.
During absence due to illness or vacation this person shall substituted by
another one with similar skill.
4. If necessary the onsite support can be carried out by different experts
provided that the number does not exceed three persons.
5. On request of CCG the Seller shall exchange the person for the onsite
support.
10.6 DE-INSTALLATION
1. The de-installation fee does cover the de-installation service, transport,
revision, and stockkeeping of relevant units for up to 6 months at the
suppliers premises.
11 QUALITY ASSURANCE
11.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. The tasks of the project management system are planning, staffing
forecasting and monitoring of a project or a process implementation. The
goal of the project management system is to identify risks and to initiate
actions in order to keep the targets of the project. A major part of the
project management system is to report status and results of the project to
its initiators.
2. The project management of the supplier shall be implemented according to the
rules of ISO 9001.
3. The Seller's project management system shall cover:
o A project organisation matrix including responsibilities,
authorities and resources involved in the project.
o A project activity plan including overview, project locations,
responsibilities and milestones on a task by task basis.
o progress monitoring and control
o problem monitoring and control
o Risk management procedures
o Recovery plan in case of deviation from project schedule
o Reporting procedures (in form of project specific metrics), e.g.
for system development, manufacturing and committed services.
11.2 QUALITY PLAN
1. The Seller shall provide a quality manual to CCG on request.
2. The Seller shall supply to CCG within 42 calendar days of the Date of
Contract a Quality Plan in a form agreed with CCG demonstrating how the
inspection / quality arrangements specified by CCG are to be applied to the
Contract.
3. Any quality assurance service is provided without cost for CCG.
11.3 QUALITY AUDITS
1. The Seller shall accept quality audits from CCG or a third party reporting to
CCG.
2. The Seller shall give CCG or a third party reporting to CCG access to all
sites and key personnel for the purposes of quality audits.
3. The quality audits shall include unrestricted questioning of personnel as
well as demonstration of the system under development.
4. The dates of technical audits shall be determined by CCG and shall not
require earlier than 3 working days notice to the supplier.
11.4 FAULT HISTORY SYSTEM
1. The Seller shall demonstrate to CCG that procedures exist for the provision
and ongoing maintenance of an equipment fault history system. The system
shall be capable of retaining information with regard to equipment that has
been returned for repair irrespective of whether a fault has been found.
2. The Seller shall have a facility to track equipment from CCG to the repair
facility and vice versa. Such records must be kept by the Seller for a
minimum of one year.
3. The Seller shall provide repair statistics broken down by unit type in
warranty and post warranty repair sufficient to control the Seller's
performance against his commitments.
12
13 TIME SCHEDULES
13.1 TYPE ACCEPTANCE
13.1.1 TYPE ACCEPTANCE PREPARATION
[GRAPHIC OMITTED]
13.1.2
13.1.3 TYPE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
[GRAPHIC OMITTED]
SCOPE OF DELIVERY LOCATION DOCUMENTATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0016
REVISION 1.0 / APPROVED
DATE 26 Aug 1999
CONFIDENTIALITY CCG CONFIDENTIAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systems engineering ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Network operation
APPROVED Network planning
FILE NAME Scope of Delivery Location Documentation-10
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This guideline defines a general standard for the
layout documentation of transmission systems in the
CCG network.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 09/04/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 SCOPE ..................................................... 3
2 FORMAT .................................................... 3
3 CONTENTS OF DOCUMENTATION ................................. 3
3.1 CHANGE OVERVIEW 3
3.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS ....................................... 3
3.3 LOCATION-RELATED NETWORK OVERVIEWS ...................... 3
3.3.1 INTERCONNECTION OF NETWORK ELEMENTS ................. 3
3.3.2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT .................................. 4
3.3.3 SYNCHRONIZATION ..................................... 4
3.3.4 DCN ................................................. 4
3.3.5 SERVICE TELEPHONE ................................... 5
3.4 INSTALLATION DRAWING .................................... 5
3.5 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATIONS ................................ 5
3.5.1 SUBRACK CONFIGURATIONS .............................. 5
3.5.2 RACK FUSE PANEL ..................................... 5
3.6 CONNECTING CABLES ....................................... 6
3.7 POWER SUPPLY ............................................ 6
3.8 DISTRIBUTION FRAME ASSIGNMENTS .......................... 6
3.8.1 SYMMETRICAL SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR ...................... 6
3.8.2 OPTICAL AND COAXIAL DISTRIBUTION FRAMES ............. 7
3.9 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ................................... 7
3.10 CONTACT PERSONS ........................................ 7
1 SCOPE
1. The system supplier shall compile and supply layout documentation for each
location, at which his system engineering equipment is installed. All
services provided by the supplier in connection with the installation,
configuration and commissioning of the technical installations supplied by
him are described in this documentation.
2 FORMAT
1. The layout documentation is to be submitted to CCG both in paper format as
well as in electronic form prior to acceptance by CCG (FAC).
2. The electronic form of the documentation is to be compiled by means of the
documentation program Infocable-Registered Trademark- of the Institut fur
Informatik in Entwurf und Fertigung zu Berlin GmbH.
3. The documentation in paper form is to be compiled in triplicate.
4. Any retrofits or changes to the system layout implemented by the system
supplier are to be documented in the form of change sheets and updates of
the software documentation.
5. The revision status of the documentation is indicated by the date of
transfer.
3 CONTENTS OF DOCUMENTATION
1. Each sheet of the documentation must contain at least the following
identification features:
- Document name
- Page number
- Compilation date
- Version number
3.1 CHANGE OVERVIEW
1. The documentation shall contain a change overview specifying the change
status number and the page numbers concerned. The change overview shall be
dispensed with in the event of replacing the complete documentation. The
relevant status/date is to be defined.
3.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. The documentation shall contain a table of contents listing all
corresponding sections of the documentation. The table of contents is to be
structured corresponding to this document. The table of contents can also
serve as a cover sheet.
3.3 LOCATION-RELATED NETWORK OVERVIEWS
3.3.1 INTERCONNECTION OF NETWORK ELEMENTS
1. The location-related layout documentation shall contain an overview that
describes the interconnection of the network elements. The corresponding
network elements as well as their interface cards are to be specified for
each connection. The overview is to be compiled separately according to
locations.
3.3.2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of the network management system
containing at least the following points:
- Overview of network management architecture with LAN addresses
- Equipment view of LAN connections
- Tabular overview of NMS systems used with manufacturer's name and serial
number
- Tabular overview of peripheral devices (e.g. printers) with
manufacturer's name and serial number
3.3.3 SYNCHRONIZATION
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of clock priorities set at the
network elements.
3.3.4 DCN
1. The documentation shall contain a location-related overview of the DCNs
specifying at least the following points:
- DCN overview of the channel routing
- Overview of overhead bytes if applicable
- Configuration of overhead byte cross connections
- Bridge/router configuration
- Address (NSAP, IP etc)
3.3.5 SERVICE TELEPHONE
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of the configuration of service
telephone modules specifying the following points:
- Station number
- Station name
- Service telephone number, internal
- Service telephone number, external
3.4 INSTALLATION DRAWING
1. The documentation shall contain a location-related installation drawing
containing at least the following points:
- Position of the racks in the technical installations room
- Arrangement of the racks as well as their rack numbers
- Designations of the racks
- Arrangement of subracks as well as their subrack numbers
- Designation of subracks
2. The racks and subracks are to be numbered and designated in compliance with
CCG specifications.
3.5 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATIONS
3.5.1 SUBRACK CONFIGURATIONS
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of the equipment configurations,
containing at least the following points:
- Schematic representation of subrack
- Rack and subrack number
- Designation of NE type (e.g. TM-4/1)
- Identification number of subrack
- Voltage supply and fuse protection used (e.g. 48 V/fuse 10 A)
- Power consumption
- Plug-in slot number
- Designation of plug-in unit
- Serial number
- Hardware status
- Firmware status
- Change status
2. The racks and subracks are to be numbered and designated in compliance with
CCG specifications.
3. If a subrack contains additional interface modules, they must be
documented accordingly by:
- Plug-in slot number
- Designation of plug-in unit
- Serial number
- Hardware status
- Firmware status (if applicable)
- Change status
3.5.2 RACK FUSE PANEL
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of the installed rack fuse
panels containing at least the following points:
- Schematic representation of rack fuse panel
- Designation of fuse panel
- Rack number
- Designation of plug-in module
- Voltage supply and fuse protection (e.g. 48 V/20 A)
- Designation of respective load or of upstream fuse panel
2. The fuse panels are to be designated in accordance with CCG specifications.
3.6 CONNECTING CABLES
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of all cabling implemented. This
requirement also comprises layout-specific DCN, synchronisation and power
cabling. The overview must contain at least the following points:
- Port designation A-end
- Port designation B-end
- Remarks (e.g. shield protected with insulating sleeve)
- Type of cable used
3.7 POWER SUPPLY
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of all installed power supply
units containing the following:
- Schematic representation of subrack
- Designation of type of power supply
- ID number
- Voltage supply and fuse protection (e.g. 230 V/fuse 10 A)
- Designation of plug-in slot
- Power supply cabling
- Serial number
- Hardware status
- Firmware status
- Change status
2. The racks and subracks are to be numbered and designated in compliance with
CCG specifications.
3.8 DISTRIBUTION FRAME ASSIGNMENTS
1. The documentation shall contain an overview of all distribution frame
assignments implemented as part of the system installation procedure. The
contents of the distribution frame documentation are dependent on the type
of distribution frame system used and is to be described in the following
subsections.
2. In any case, the documentation must ensure a distinct local description of
each individual port. The overviews are to be listed in tabular form in
compliance with CCG specifications.
3.8.1 SYMMETRICAL SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR
1. The documentation shall contain at least the following specifications for
the connection to the network element in the direction of the patch panel,
for the connection to the patch panel in the direction of the distributor or
patch panel and for the connection to the strapping panel in the direction
of the patch panel:
- Bay
- Strip
- Terminal slot
2. The documentation shall contain at least the following specifications for
the connection to the patch panel in the direction of the network element:
- Rack
- Subrack
- Slot
- Port
3.8.2 OPTICAL AND COAXIAL DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
1. The documentation shall contain at least the following specifications for
the connection to the network element in the direction of the patch panel,
for the connection to the patch panel in the direction of the distribution
frame or patch panel and for the connection to the strapping panel in the
direction of the patch panel:
- Bay
- Panel
- Coupler unit number
2. The documentation shall contain at least the following specifications for
the connection to the patch panel in the direction of the network element:
- Rack
- Subrack
- Slot
- Port
3.9 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
1. All abbreviations used are to be written out in full and explained in
German in the list of abbreviations.
3.10 CONTACT PERSONS
1. The system supplier and CCG shall nominate at least one contact person and
one further contact person for further coordination of the layout
documentation.
LEGENDEN
Seite 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Cabinet
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fluchtrichtung Escape direction
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 4
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Verteilerplatte Distribution board
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steckerpaar Connector pair
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
z.B. e.g.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Cabinet
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bucht Bay
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zeichnung Drawing
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Ansicht von oben) (Top view)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zusatzlicher Steg Additional web
(Schiene A12386) (rail A12386)
fur Verteilertyp for distributor types
1, 2, 4 und 5 1, 2, 4 and 5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LWL Umlenkbleche Optical fibre cable guide plates
fur 8 Patchkabel for 8 patch cables
(ausser bei Typ 5) (except for type 5)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sender der Systemtechnik Transmitter of system engineering
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steckerpaar Connector pair
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Empfanger der Systemtechnik Receiver of system engineering
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 7
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gerateseite Equipment side
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Signalleiste Signal strip
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sender Port Transmitter port
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Empfanger Port Receiver port
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelseite Cable side
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarmverteiler Alarm distribution frame
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8x ▇ ▇▇-▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ strips
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Platz fur 64 DA) (place for 64 DA)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 9
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lochstreben zur Kabelbefestigung Perforated struts for cable fastening
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aluquerstrebe Aluminium cross strut
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Befestigung hinterste Ebene) (mounting of rearmost level)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelfuhrungswinkel Cable routing bracket
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Rangierhaken) (routing hooks)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelfuhrung und Zugentlastung fur LWL Cable routing and strain relief for optical fibre cables
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Klemmbugel) (strain relief clamp)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Befestigung der LSA+ Stangenprofile Mounting of LSA+ bar sections
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Spleissbox von Firma Krone Krone splice box
je Spleissbox 24 Fasern 24 fibres per splice box
(max. 144 Fasern) (max. 144 fibres)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelabfangblech Cable clamping plate
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230V Steckdose 230 V socket outlet
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gesamtlange 100 cm (3x 1.2 cm Befestigung + Total length 100 cm (3x 1.2 cm mounting + 96 cm free bar
96 cm freies Stangensystem) system)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Spleissbox splice box
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lochstreben zur Kabelbefestigung Perforated struts for cable fastening
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alustrebe (Befestigung hinterste Ebene) Aluminium cross strut (mounting of rearmost level)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Verteilerplatten fur LWL Distribution boards for optical fibre cables
24 ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Gerateseite 24 boards equipment side
(24 ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ 4 Ports = 96 Ports) (24 boards at 4 ports each = 96 ports)
24 ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Kabelseite 24 boards cable side
(24 ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ 4 Ports = 96 Ports) (24 boards at 4 ports each = 96 ports)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelfuhrung und Zugentlastung fur LWL Cable routing and strain relief for optical fibre
(Klemmbugel) cables (strain-relief clamp)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelabfangblech Cable clamping plate
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
230 V Steckdose 230 V socket outlet
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gerateseite Equipment side
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kabelseite Cable side
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seite 12
Perforated struts for cable fastening
Aluminium cross strut (mounting of rearmost level)
Cable routing bracket (routing hooks)
Distribution boards for optical fibre cables (12 boards at 4 fibre pairs each =
48 fibre pairs)
Distribution board for coaxial interfaces 34/140 MBit/s, STM-1 electrical (12
boards at 4 ports each = 48 ports)
Cable routing and strain relief for optical fibre cables (strain-relief clamp)
Aluminium cross strut (mounting of rearmost level)
Aluminium cross strut
Mounting of LSA+ bar sections
LSA Plus isolating plug connectors 8x ABS with jumper wire feed left
Dimensions:
16 ports = 4 strips => 12 cm
Possible number of strips:
128 ports = 24 strips => 98 cm
LSA Plus isolating plug connectors 8x ABS with jumper wire feed right
Dimensions:
16 ports = 4 strips => 12 cm
Possible number of strips:
128 ports = 24 strips => 98 cm
Aluminium cross strut
Mounting of LSA+ bar sections
Aluminium cross strut
Cable clamping plate
230 V socket outlet
Cable side
Equipment side
For LSA+ strips 2x 48 cm 0 LESS THAN 8x 16 ports
Total length 100 cm (mounting 3x 1.2 cm
+ 96 cm LSA+)
Seite 13
Cable clamping plate
Power supply
Aluminium cross strut
Mounting of LSA+ bar sections
LSA+ isolating strips
8x ABS with jumper wire feed, left
LSA+ isolating strips
8x ABS with jumper wire feed, right
Aluminium cross strut
Distribution boards for coaxial interfaces
34/140 MBit/s, STM-electrical
(4 ports per board)
Mounting of LSA+bar sections
Aluminium cross strut
Cable clamping plate
230 V socket outlet
Cable side
Equipment side
For LSA+ strips 60 cm = 5x 16 ports
Total length 82.4 cm (mounting 2x 1.2 cm + 50 cm LSA+)
Seite 14
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gestellreihe Frame row
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Schrankplatz Cabinet location
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rahmen (Shelf) Shelf
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steckplatz Plug-in slot
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stecknummer Connector number
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GUIDELINES FOR THE LAYOUT OF SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0002
REVISION 1.0 / DRAFT
DATE 09 Apr 1999
CONFIDENTIALITY CCG CONFIDENTIAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR Systems engineering ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED Network operation
APPROVED Product management
APPROVED Network planning
NOTICE Location layout
FILE NAME Guidelines for the Layout of Signal Distribution
Frames-10
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document describes the guidelines which the
system manufacturer must adhere to regarding the
layout of the distribution frames for CCG.
All connections of the devices and equipment used by
CCG are to be routed and assigned to terminal boards.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 25/01/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Initial
revision
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO DISTRIBUTION FRAMES...............................3
1.1 FRAME RACK LAYOUT.........................................................4
1.2 COUPLER UNIT PANELS....................................................4
1.3 FIBRE SPLICE BOXES.....................................................6
1.4 DISTRIBUTION STRIPS FOR SYMMETRICAL CABLING............................6
2. TYPES OF DISTRIBUTION FRAME................................................8
TYPE 1 -SDH REGENERATOR LOCATION...........................................8
TYPE 2 -POP CABLE TERMINAL CABINET.........................................9
TYPE 3 - POP -OPTICAL AND COAX INTERFACES.................................10
TYPE 4 - POP -COAX AND SYM. INTERFACES....................................11
TYPE 5 -CUSTOMER LOCATIONS................................................13
LABELLING OF DISTRIBUTION FRAMES.............................................14
NUMBERING SYSTEM.............................................................14
ABBREVIATIONS................................................................15
REFERENCES...................................................................15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
1. Location To ensure the distribution cabinet has a defined
location in the station irrespective of the station
configuration, the distribution cabinet is to be
installed at the beginning or end of a row of racks.
In rooms with cavity floors, the installation layout is
to be adapted to the pitch of the floor tiles.
2. Mounting If installed individually, the cabinet is to be secured
to the wall and/or ceiling.
3. Grounding Each distribution and technical installations cabinet
is grounded at the nearest located equipotential
bonding strip or earth-circuit connector.
4. Dimensions The distribution frames correspond to the dimensions
specified by the Standard ETS 300 119 and are:
W = 600 mm, H = 2200 mm, T = 300 mm
5. Doors In the same way as the technical installations racks,
the distribution frames are to be equipped with
lockable doors.
In compliance with fire protection regulations, the
door hinge arrangement must be selected such that the
doors fall shut in the direction of the escape route.
[GRAPHIC]
6. Door alarm Opening of the distribution frame doors is monitored by
contacts means of alarm contacts that are contacts connected to
the external alarm of the system engineering.
7. Door locks The cabinets are locked
8. 230 V connection A (230 V) socket outlet is to be provided in the lower
panel of the cabinets.
1.1 FRAME RACK LAYOUT
[GRAPHIC]
Figure: Example of a distribution cabinet
9. Cable routing Cable routing brackets are used to facilitate
brackets flexible cable routing specific to system brackets
requirements.
Optimum utilization of the space available in the
various types of distribution frame is to be ensured by
using the largest possible routing bracket.
10. Direction of Cabinet wiring blocks are to be arranged horizontally
cabinet wiring (from bay A to bay B)
blocks
11. Carrier system The LSA 95 mm wide sectional bar supplied by Krone is
for distribution used as the basis for symmetrical distribution frame
frames systems and splice boxes.
The mounting bracket Item No. 6577 2 834-00 is used for
mounting the sectional bars. The length of the bar
sections depends on the relevant type of distribution
frame.
1.2 COUPLER UNIT PANELS
12. Application Signal application and routing for all coaxial STM-1,
140 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s connections
Signal application and routing for all optical ▇▇▇-▇,
▇▇▇-▇, ▇▇▇-▇▇, ▇▇▇-▇▇ connections
13. Mounting panels Distribution boards are used for mounting the coupler
for coupler units units.
All cabling to the network elements are routed to the
distribution fields from the rear.
In principle, the distribution boards for coaxial
cables are designed the same as the distribution
boards for optical fibre cables.
[GRAPHIC]
14. Type of coupler unit, optical Coupler unit type E2000/diagonal is
to be used as the optocoupler.
15. Bending radius Appropriate fixing of the optical
fibre patch cables is specified in
order to maintain the minimum
bending radius of 3.5 cm for
optical fibre pigtails.
16. Type of coupler unit, electrical The coupler unit type IEC 169-13
1.6/5.6 75 Ohm socket is used as
the electrical coaxial coupler
unit.
The coaxial interfaces are routed
and allocated by means of patch
cables with 1.6/5.6 angle
connectors at both ends.
Strapping is provided in crosswise
configuration.
17. Labelling Transmitters and receivers are
marked by arrow symbols.
18. Rx / Tx Refered to the systems engineering
interface, the transmitter is
located on the left, the receiver
on the right.
Location
[GRAPHIC]
19. Patch cables The patch cables in a distribution
cabinet have standard lengths of
1.0 m, 1.6 m and 2.2 m.
The shortest cable length should be
used for wiring block strapping.
1.3 FIBRE SPLICE BOXES
20. Application Optical fibre splice box mounts are
required when longer optical
in-house connections are not used
together with standard
prefabricated optical cables.
21. Type of splice box The type supplied by Krone mounted
on LSA+ sectional round bar system
is used as the fibre splice box.
A carrier system can accept a
maximum of two fibre splice boxes.
Each fibre splice box can contain
up to 12 splices.
The fibres are routed to the
optical fibre distribution boards.
1.4 DISTRIBUTION STRIPS FOR SYMMETRICAL CABLING
22. Application Signal routing and patch
distribution for all 2 M signals
- All external alarm inputs of
the devices
- 2 MHz (clock) inputs and
outputs used
23. Type of strip Cables for the technical
installations and connecting cables
are arranged on Krone LSA+ ABS
distribution strips.
24. Cable feed and assignments The cable side is routed from above
onto the distribution strips, the
strapping side from below.
The strips are assigned in the
minimum configuration of 2 strips
each (see drawing).
Rx and Tx directions are each
arranged on separate strips.
Strapping can therefore be "free of
crossing" between the left and
right bay.
[GRAPHIC]
25. Special requirements for clock A distribution strip for clock
cabling distribution is provided for each
row of rack frames. The network
element interfaces (T3 in, T3 out)
are cabled, however, only on
special request.
26. Special requirements for alarm The alarm inputs of the technical
contacts contacts installations and the alarm of the
station are routed on LSA+
distribution strips.
The alarm contact for the frame
door to the technical installations
is based on a decentralized
configuration on the respective
system engineering frame and
connected to the alarm contact #1
of the network element implemented
in the frame.
The other alarm contacts are
arranged centrally per row of rack
frames on one distributor.
27. Distribution assignments for alarm (t.b.d.)
contacts
2. TYPES OF DISTRIBUTION FRAME
TYPE 1 - SDH REGENERATOR LOCATION
No separate distribution cabinet is implemented in the regenerator locations.
Only external alarm signals are to be routed to these locations equipped with 8
Krone LSA+ distribution strips for 8 double cores.
TYPE 2 - PoP CABLE TERMINAL CABINET
This type of distribution frame serves the purpose of housing several connecting
cables with splice boxes in PoPs.
Application example: Arrangement of optical connecting cables between a removed
cable terminating facility and backbone technical installations.
The Krone splice boxes are arranged in the lower area and the optical fibre
distribution frames in the upper area. With a standard cable lead-in from below,
the splice boxes are expanded from top to bottom.
Splice boxes and distribution boards feature following fixed allocations:
o Top left splice box (-) Bay A distribution boards 1-3
o Bottom left splice box (-) Bay A distribution boards 4-6
o Centre splice box, top bay (-) Bay A distribution boards 7-9
o Centre splice box, bottom bay (-) Bay A distribution boards 10 - 12
o Top right splice box (-) Bay B distribution boards 1-3
o Bottom right splice box (-) Bay B distribution boards 4-6
The outer sockets are to be assigned first.
Distribution frame capacity: Cable connection for maximum 144 fibres, optical
fibre conductors
[GRAPHIC]
[GRAPHIC]
TYPE 3 - PoP - OPTICAL AND COAX INTERFACES
This type of distribution frame serves the purpose of internal
optical/electrical routing in the PoP. A maximum of 96 connections can be
allocated.
[GRAPHIC]
TYPE 4 - PoP - COAX AND SYM. INTERFACES
Symmetrical and asymmetrical interfaces are arranged on the distribution frame.
Application example: Routing between company-own technical system equipment and
co-located system engineering of the customer or local network operator.
Distribution capacity:
48 ports coax equipment side (12 distribution boards)
48 ports coax cable side (12 distribution boards)
[GRAPHIC]
[GRAPHIC]
128 Ports 2 MBit/s symmetrical - equipment side (96 cm round bar system)
128 Ports 2 MBit/s symmetrical - cable side (96 cm round bar system)
Optional (if fewer 2MBit/s ports are installed):
Alarm distribution frame (10x Krone LSA+ distribution strips)
TYPE 5 - CUSTOMER LOCATIONS
This type of distribution frame serves as a typical cabinet in the customer
location.
The cabinet contains the system technical installations and a secured power
supply. All types of interface can be mounted on the Krone round bar system.
Alarm distributors (2x Krone LSA+ distribution strips) are provided for external
alarm inputs.
[GRAPHIC]
LABELLING OF DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
NUMBERING SYSTEM
The cabling from the technical installations to the distribution cabinet is
labelled on both sides.
[GRAPHIC]
The labelling describes the connector on the system engineering side. The
numbering of the cabinets in each station is determined during the planning
phase. The maximum distance of the labelling to the connector should be 10 cm.
Example:
▇▇▇ ▇▇-▇▇▇ 02 The device is located in frame rack row A cabinet 01 and shelf 1
The port assembly in plug-in slot 102 the second connector from the top
Also refer to CCG document "Technical Guidelines for the Labelling of Cabling in
the CCG Transmission Network".
ABBREVIATIONS
DA Double core
HRL High Return Loss
LSA-Plus KRONE connection system free of soldering, screws and
insulation stripping
LWL Optical fibre cable
koax. Coaxial 75 Ohm interface
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 155,520 Mbit/s SDH
STM-4 622,080 Mbit/s SDH
STM-16 2488,320 Mbit/s SDH
sym. Symmetrical 120 Ohm interface
REFERENCES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID Title
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ST-rfx-0017 Technical Guidelines for the Labelling in the CCG
Transmission Network
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TECHNICAL GUIDELINES ON CABLE LENGTHS
-------------------------------------------------------
ID ST-rfx-0018
REVISION 2.0 / FINAL
DATE 14 Jan ▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ CONFIDENTIAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUTHOR System technology ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇
APPROVED NP
NIS
NOTICE PM
FILENAME ST-rfx-0018-2.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION This document describes the guidelines for the cabling
within the transmission network of LNC. It specifies
the types of cables to be used and their maximum cable
length.
These guidelines are applicable for cabling the system
technology to the distributor for patching on the
distributor and for the connection cable within a
location.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHANGE LOG 1.0 / APPROVED / 25/01/99 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Initial revision
2.0 / FINAL / 07/10/00 / ▇. ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ Supplement
RJ-45 Cabling
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 CONTENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Contents.................................................................2
2 Introduction.............................................................3
3 Definitions and abbreviations............................................3
3.1 Definitions...........................................................3
3.2 Abbreviations.........................................................3
4 Technical guidelines on cable lengths....................................4
4.1 Electrical interfaces.................................................4
4.1.1 Interfaces according to G.703....................................4
4.1.2 Cable values for coaxial station cable...........................4
4.1.3 Cable values for symmetrical station cable.......................6
4.1.4 Connection cable to separate customer distributor................6
4.1.5 RJ-45 cabling....................................................6
4.1.6 Patching cable on distributor....................................9
4.1.6.1 Coaxial patching cable......................................9
4.1.6.2 Symmetrical patching cable..................................9
5 References...............................................................9
5.1 Standards.............................................................9
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
INTRODUCTION
This document describes the guidelines within the LNC transport network. The
types of cables and maximum cable lengths are specified.
The cabling of the system technology to the distributor, patching on the
distributor and connection cable within a location are described. Connection
cables between two locations are not taken into consideration.
5 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.2 ABBREVIATIONS
DA Twisted pair
LWL Fiber optic cable
6
7 TECHNICAL GUIDELINES ON CABLE LENGTHS
7.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
7.1.1 INTERFACES ACCORDING TO G.703
The guidelines for the maximum attenuation are described by the interface
description according to G.703.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data rate of interface Characteristic Maximum path attenuation Measured at frequency
according to G.703 resistance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm 6 dBm 1,024 kHz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm 6 dBm 1,024 kHz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Mbit/s 75 Ohm 6 dBm 4,224 kHz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 Mbit/s 75 Ohm 12 dBm 17,184 kHz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140 Mbit/s 75 Ohm 12 dBm 70 MHz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
155 Mbit/s 75 Ohm 12.7 dBm 78 MHz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1.2 CABLE VALUES FOR COAXIAL STATION CABLE
Types of cables in bold face are preferred. For the cables with lower
attenuation, the space requirement and greater bending radiuses, particular in
the cabinet, must be taken into consideration due to the larger size.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATA RATE 2 MBIT/S COAXIAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Characteristic Cross talk Attenuation Range with Comments
Type of cable resistance attenuation at 1 MHz 20% reserve
(f=5MHz) [dB/100m]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02Y(St)CY 0.45/2.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 1.8 dB 260 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02Y(St)CY 8X0.45/2.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 1.8 dB 260 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YC(mS)CY 0,5/3,0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 1.5 dB 320 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YCCY 1,0/6,5 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 0.7 dB 680 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATA RATE 34 MBIT/S COAXIAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Characteristic Cross talk Attenuation Range with Comments
Type of cable resistance attenuation at 17MHz 20% reserve
(f=5MHz) [dB/100m]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02Y(St)CY 0.45/2.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 8 dB 120 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02Y(St)CY 8X0.45/2.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 8 dB 120 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YC(mS)CY 0.5/3,0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 6.6 dB 145 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YCCY 1.0/6.5 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 3 dB 320 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATA RATE 140/155 MBIT/S COAXIAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Characteristic Cross talk Attenuation Range with Comments
Type of cable resistance attenuation at 70MHz 20% reserve
(f=5MHz) [dB/100m]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02Y(St)CY 0.45/2.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 16.5 dB 58 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02Y(St)CY 8X0.45/2.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 16.5 dB 58 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YC(mS)CY 0.5/3.0 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 14 dB 68 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YCCY 1.0/6.5 75 Ohm GREATER THAN 160 dB 6.2 dB 150 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The specifications on the range do not include attenuation from distributors or
similar connections. These additional attenuation values must be taken in
consideration in the limit range.
7.1.3
7.1.4. CABLE VALUES FOR SYMMETRICAL STATION CABLE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATA RATE 2 MBIT/S SYMMETRICAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Characteristic Cross talk Attenuation Range with Comments
Type of cable resistance attenuation at 1MHz 20% reserve
(f=5MHz) [dB/100m]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S-02YS(St)Y 1X2X0.4 114 Ohm GREATER THAN 100 dB 4.0 dB 120 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2Y(St)Y 1x2x0.5/1.5 113 Ohm GREATER THAN 98 dB 2.2 dB 210 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2Y(St)Y 1x2x0.5/2.2 141 Ohm GREATER THAN 100 dB 1.6 dB 300 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2YDD(ms)Y 1x2x0.5/2.2 141 Ohm GREATER THAN 135 dB 1.6 dB 300 m
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S-09YS(St)Y 1x 2x 0.4 120 Ohm - 4.2 dB 110 m **1 **2
+/- 12 Ohm
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The specifications on the range do not include attenuation from distributors or
similar connections. These additional attenuation values must be taken in
consideration in the limit range.
Use symmetrical cable when the twisted pairs are shielded separately, otherwise,
these cables are not used at LNC.
**1 Supplier: Alcatel Cable FILOTEX, Alcatel Kabel AG & Co.
**2 Designation: "Betefa-Kabel 1x 2x 0.4"
**3 Designation: "Filotex-Kabel 8x 2x 0.4 - ET 298 571"
7.1.5 CONNECTION CABLE TO SEPARATE CUSTOMER DISTRIBUTOR
Only the types of cable listed above may be used as connection cable to separate
customer transfer distributors.
In order to ensure sufficient protection of the cable, multiple conductor cable
with additional outer jacketing is to be used on a preferred basis.
7.1.6 RJ-45 CABLING
As for all other cabling LambdaNet will install a patch field in the rack to be
wired (here for up to 24 RJ-45) and wire this panel. The customer can use the
cable via the panel sockets.
ISDN CABLE S(0) (CATEGORY 3)
J-2Y(ST)Y STIII BD n x 2 x 0.6
J-2Y(ST)H STIII BD n x 2 x 0.6 halogen-free FRNC
e.g. 20 x 2 d=12mm
10 x 2 d=9mm
4 x 2 d=7.5mm
For construction of class C cable paths with transmission bandwidths of up to
16MHz.
Application:
- System side installation cable between telephone system and telephone patch
panel
- Installation cable between building distribution and floor distribution
(secondary cabling)
Standards: Based on DIN VDE 0815
Characteristic resistance (+/- 15%) 100 Ohm
Propagation rate (NVP) 0.66
Capacity coating (30-120)nF/km
On spiral quad, cables diametrically opposing conductors are to be wired as a/b
conductors (see illustration below).
O b1
O O a2 b2
O a1
FIG.: VIEW OF END OF CABLE - SPIRAL QUAD ASSIGNMENT
The cable already used by LCN for conventional 2Mbit/s cabling (120 Ohm) is to
be used for S(2M) connections.
CABLE (CAT. 5 FTP)
J-02YS(ST)Y 4 x 2 x 0.5 (AWG 24)
J-02YS(ST)H 4 x 2 x 0.5 (AWG 24) halogen-free FRNC
e.g. 4 x 2 d=6.3mm
Shielded installation cable for structured cabling. For construction of plastic
cabling paths with transmission bandwidths up to 100 MHz and standard
requirements for EMC and transmission security .
Standards: ISO/IEC 11801, EN 50173, EN 50167, EIA/TIA 568
Application:
- Installation cable between patch panel and equipment connection socket as
floor cabling (tertiary cabling)
- Ethernet: IEEE 802.3, 10BaseT, 10 Mbps
- Fast Ethernet: IEEE 802.3u, 100BaseT, 100 Mbps
- Token Ring: IEEE 802.5, 4 / 16 Mbps
- ISDN
Characteristic resistance (+/- 15%) 100 Ohm
Propagation rate (NVP) 0.78
Bending radius when laying 48 mm
Bending radius in operation (permanently laid) 24 mm
CABLE (CAT. 5 S-FTP)
J-02YS(ST)CY 4 x 2 x 0.5 (AWG 24)
J-02YS(ST)CH 4 x 2 x 0.5 (AWG 24) halogen-free FRNC
e.g. 4 x 2 d=6.4mm
Double shielded installation cable for structured cabling system. For
construction of plastic cabling paths with transmission bandwidths up to 100 MHz
and standard requirements for transmission security and high requirements for
EMC.
Standards: ISO/IEC 11801, EN 50173, EN 50167, EIA/TIA 568
Application:
- Installation cable between patch panel and equipment socket as floor cabling
(tertiary cabling)
- Ethernet: IEEE 802.3, 10BaseT, 10 Mbps
- Fast Ethernet: IEEE 802.3u, 100BaseT, 100 Mbps
- Token Ring: IEEE 802,5, 4 / 16 Mbps
- ATM: 155 Mbps, FDDI: TP-PMD 100 Mbps, ISDN
Characteristic resistance (+/- 15%) 100 Ohm
Propagation rate (NVP) 0.78
Bending radius when laying 52 mm
Bending radius in operation (permanently laid) 26 mm
7.1.7
7.1.8 PATCHING CABLE ON DISTRIBUTOR
7.1.8.1 COAXIAL PATCHING CABLE
Patching on the distributor is to be accomplished only with suitable cable. The
cable must have the required characteristic resistance. The patching cable
should be designed with sufficient flexibility to allow simple cable routing on
the distributor.
7.1.8.2 SYMMETRICAL PATCHING CABLE
Only shielded symmetrical 120 Ohm cable is to be used for patching on the
distributor and the shield is to be connected at both ends of the patch.
8 REFERENCES
8.1 STANDARDS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID Version Title:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITU-T G.703 1991 Physical/Electrical Characteristics of
Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
================================================================================
CONFIDENTIALITY AGREEMENT
PREAMBLE
The parties have concluded a contractual agreement governing the delivery of
transmission systems and the associated services. During the term of the
contractual agreement, the parties will exchange confidential information for
the purpose of implementing the subject matter of the contractual agreement.
With regard to the parties wishing to avoid abuse of this information, the
following shall be defined by contractual agreement:
(1) The parties shall herewith commit themselves to treat all information they
obtain either directly or indirectly from the other party within the
framework of implementing the contractual agreement, strictly
confidentially. Treating information confidentially means that the
information received from the other party must not be made accessible to
third parties and this information must not be used commercially for own
purposes or for third parties. The parties shall commit themselves to using
the received information solely for the purpose stipulated in the preamble.
Any use of the information beyond the stipulated purpose or its transfer to
third parties shall require the written approval of the information
provider. The transfer of information to affiliated group companies and/or
to individual consultants as deemed necessary for the purpose of
implementing the contractual agreement shall, however, be permitted without
specific written approval of the information provider under the
prerequisite that these persons commit themselves in writing to treating
the information confidentially in compliance with this contractual
agreement.
Each party shall protect the information received from the other party with
the same care and diligence used to protect the own company and business
secrets and additionally with the care and diligence of a prudent business
partner.
(2) The obligation to observe secrecy shall not apply to information
which is already publicly known at the time of relinquishment or - through
no fault of the information recipient - is subsequently known publicly;
which was already known to the information recipient prior to
relinquishment or subsequently relinquished to him legitimately by a third
party without him being obliged to observe secrecy by said third party;
which, in accordance with legal requirements, is to be published by the
information recipient. Insofar as permissible, the information recipient
shall notify the informing party of the publication.
It shall be incumbent on the information recipient to verify the
exceptional statuses specified in this subparagraph item.
(3) On request of the respective other party, each party shall be
obligated to immediately return written information or information
recorded in any other manner (including any copies made) to the
requesting party or to confirm its eradication by destruction in
writing.
(4) The confidentiality agreement shall come into force on being signed by both
parties. The obligation to observe confidentiality shall remain valid for a
period of five years - also beyond termination of the contractual agreement
stipulated in the preamble -.
(5) The parties shall agree that no transfer of titles of ownership or rights
of use shall be involved in the transfer of information. Conclusion of this
contractual agreement shall not entitle any of the parties to act on behalf
of the other party in any way whatsoever. Any commitment of the parties in
internal and external relations that extend beyond the framework of this
contractual agreement shall require a further written contractual
agreement.
================================================================================
(6) If one stipulation of this contractual agreement is or becomes ineffective
either in full or in part, this shall not affect the validity of the
remaining stipulations. Instead of the ineffective stipulation, the legally
permissible arrangement that most closely expresses the meaning and purpose
of the ineffective stipulation shall be considered as agreed upon. The
above stipulations shall apply accordingly in the case of a gap or loophole
requiring amendment.
(7) Amendments and supplements to this contractual agreement shall require the
written form. This shall also apply to agreements designed to restrict or
cancel the requirement of the written form.
(8) The place of jurisdiction for all disputes stemming from this contractual
agreement shall be Hanover.
ANLAGE 8
LIST OF AFFILIATES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TERRITORY NORTEL NETWORKS AFFILIATE (INCLUDING ADDRESS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FRANCE Matra Nortel Communications SAS,
▇▇, ▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇-▇▇▇▇▇'▇ ▇▇▇▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇ Quimper,
France.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNITED KINGDOM Nortel Networks plc.,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇,
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇,
▇▇.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPAIN Nortel Networks Hispania S.A.,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ - ▇,
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇,
▇▇▇▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITALY Nortel Networks SpA,
▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇,
▇▇▇▇▇ (▇▇▇▇▇▇),
▇▇▇▇▇.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PORTUGAL Nortel Networks (Portugal) ▇.▇.
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇ - ▇ ▇
▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇▇▇.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUSTRIA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CZECHIA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DENMARK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LUXEMBOURG
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANLAGE 9
LIST OF AFFILIATES - LAMBDANET
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TERRITORY LAMBDANET AFFILIATE (INCLUDING ADDRESS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FRANCE LambdaNet Communications France
1, Boulevard ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇; ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇▇
Tel.: + ▇▇ (▇) ▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇
Fax: + ▇▇ (▇) ▇▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇
LambdaNet Communications France
▇▇, ▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇
▇▇▇▇▇ ▇▇▇▇▇
Tel.: + ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇
Fax: + ▇▇ ▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇ ▇▇
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNITED KINGDOM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPAIN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ITALY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PORTUGAL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AUSTRIA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CZECHIA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DENMARK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LUXEMBOURG
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------